sanchayanmaity/minix
1
0
Fork 0
Code Issues Pull requests Packages Projects Releases Wiki Activity

install library manpages

Browse source 
. harmonize bsd.lib.mk and bsd.man.mk with netbsd files
	. throw out minix section 3 (library calls) manpages,
	  replaced by netbsd ones that are now installed
This commit is contained in:
Ben Gras 2012-02-16 01:48:46 +00:00
parent 3919b46a4d
commit 39fea0a5b9
98 changed files with 777 additions and 10375 deletions
Show stats Download patch file Download diff file Expand all files Collapse all files

10
lib/libc/md/Makefile.inc
View file

@ -7,12 +7,12 @@
SRCS+= md4c.c md5c.c md4hl.c md5hl.c
MAN+= md4.3 md5.3
#MAN+= md4.3 md5.3
MLINKS+=md4.3 MD4Init.3 md4.3 MD4Update.3 md4.3 MD4Final.3
MLINKS+=md4.3 MD4End.3 md4.3 MD4File.3 md4.3 MD4Data.3
MLINKS+=md5.3 MD5Init.3 md5.3 MD5Update.3 md5.3 MD5Final.3
MLINKS+=md5.3 MD5End.3 md5.3 MD5File.3 md5.3 MD5Data.3
#MLINKS+=md4.3 MD4Init.3 md4.3 MD4Update.3 md4.3 MD4Final.3
#MLINKS+=md4.3 MD4End.3 md4.3 MD4File.3 md4.3 MD4Data.3
#MLINKS+=md5.3 MD5Init.3 md5.3 MD5Update.3 md5.3 MD5Final.3
#MLINKS+=md5.3 MD5End.3 md5.3 MD5File.3 md5.3 MD5Data.3
CLEANFILES+= md[45]hl.c md[45].3

2
man/Makefile
View file

@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
.include <bsd.own.mk>
SUBDIR= man1 man1x man2 man3 man4 man5 man6 man7 man8 man9
SUBDIR= man1 man1x man2 man4 man5 man6 man7 man8 man9
WHATISDBDIR?= /usr/man

206
man/man3/Makefile
View file

@ -1,206 +0,0 @@
MAN= abort.3 abs.3 assert.3 atof.3 bstring.3 configfile.3 \
crypt.3 ctime.3 ctype.3 directory.3 dirname.3 \
editline.3 end.3 execl.3 exit.3 fabs.3 fclose.3 \
feholdexcept.3 ferror.3 fesetround.3 fnmatch.3 fopen.3 \
fpclassify.3 fread.3 fseek.3 getaddrinfo.3 getc.3 getcontext.3 \
getcwd.3 getdtablesize.3 getenv.3 getgrent.3 getloadavg.3 getlogin.3 \
getopt.3 getopt_long.3 getpass.3 getpwent.3 getrlimit.3 \
gets.3 getservent.3 getttyent.3 g_h_b_n.3 hton.3 int64.3 \
islessgreater.3 ldexp.3 makecontext.3 malloc.3 nearbyint.3 newctime.3 \
newstrftime.3 newtzset.3 oneC_sum.3 openpty.3 popen.3 \
printf.3 putc.3 puts.3 qsort.3 rand.3 random.3 rcmd.3 \
readv.3 realpath.3 regex.3 remainder.3 resolver.3 scanf.3 \
servxcheck.3 setbuf.3 setjmp.3 sigset.3 sleep.3 stdarg.3 \
stdio.3 string.3 strtol.3 syslog.3 system.3 termcap.3 \
termios.3 time2posix.3 ttyname.3 ttyslot.3 ungetc.3 fetch.3 md5.3 \
sha1.3
MLINKS += md5.3 MD5Init.3
MLINKS += md5.3 MD5Update.3
MLINKS += md5.3 MD5Final.3
MLINKS += md5.3 MD5End.3
MLINKS += md5.3 MD5File.3
MLINKS += sha1.3 SHA1Update.3
MLINKS += sha1.3 SHA1Init.3
MLINKS += sha1.3 SHA1Final.3
MLINKS += sha1.3 SHA1Transform.3
MLINKS += sha1.3 SHA1End.3
MLINKS += sha1.3 SHA1File.3
MLINKS += atof.3 atoi.3
MLINKS += bstring.3 bcopy.3
MLINKS += bstring.3 bcmp.3
MLINKS += bstring.3 bzero.3
MLINKS += configfile.3 config_read.3
MLINKS += configfile.3 config_delete.3
MLINKS += configfile.3 config_renewed.3
MLINKS += configfile.3 config_length.3
MLINKS += configfile.3 config_issub.3
MLINKS += configfile.3 config_isatom.3
MLINKS += ctime.3 localtime.3
MLINKS += ctime.3 difftime.3
MLINKS += ctime.3 gmtime.3
MLINKS += ctime.3 localtime.3
MLINKS += ctype.3 isalpha.3
MLINKS += ctype.3 isupper.3
MLINKS += ctype.3 islower.3
MLINKS += ctype.3 isdigit.3
MLINKS += ctype.3 isxdigit.3
MLINKS += ctype.3 isalnum.3
MLINKS += ctype.3 isspace.3
MLINKS += ctype.3 ispunct.3
MLINKS += ctype.3 isprint.3
MLINKS += ctype.3 isgraph.3
MLINKS += ctype.3 iscntrl.3
MLINKS += ctype.3 isascii.3
MLINKS += ctype.3 toupper.3
MLINKS += ctype.3 tolower.3
MLINKS += directory.3 opendir.3
MLINKS += directory.3 readdir.3
MLINKS += directory.3 rewinddir.3
MLINKS += directory.3 closedir.3
MLINKS += directory.3 telldir.3
MLINKS += end.3 etext.3
MLINKS += execl.3 execv.3
MLINKS += execl.3 execle.3
MLINKS += execl.3 execlp.3
MLINKS += execl.3 execvp.3
MLINKS += execl.3 exec.3
MLINKS += ferror.3 feof.3
MLINKS += ferror.3 clearerr.3
MLINKS += fopen.3 freopen.3
MLINKS += fpclassify.3 isfinite.3
MLINKS += fpclassify.3 isinf.3
MLINKS += fpclassify.3 isnan.3
MLINKS += fpclassify.3 isnormal.3
MLINKS += fseek.3 fseeko.3
MLINKS += fseek.3 ftell.3
MLINKS += fseek.3 ftello.3
MLINKS += g_h_b_n.3 gethostbyname.3
MLINKS += g_h_b_n.3 gethostbyaddr.3
MLINKS += g_h_b_n.3 gethostent.3
MLINKS += g_h_b_n.3 sethostent.3
MLINKS += g_h_b_n.3 endhostent.3
MLINKS += getaddrinfo.3 freeaddrinfo.3
MLINKS += getaddrinfo.3 gai_strerror.3
MLINKS += getc.3 getchar.3
MLINKS += getc.3 fgetc.3
MLINKS += getgrent.3 getgrnam.3
MLINKS += getgrent.3 getgrgid.3
MLINKS += getgrent.3 setgrent.3
MLINKS += getgrent.3 endgrent.3
MLINKS += getpwent.3 getpwnam.3
MLINKS += getpwent.3 getpwuid.3
MLINKS += getpwent.3 setpwent.3
MLINKS += getpwent.3 endpwent.3
MLINKS += getservent.3 getservbyport.3
MLINKS += getservent.3 getservbyname.3
MLINKS += getservent.3 setservent.3
MLINKS += getttyent.3 getttynam.3
MLINKS += getttyent.3 setttyent.3
MLINKS += hton.3 htons.3
MLINKS += hton.3 htonl.3
MLINKS += hton.3 ntohs.3
MLINKS += int64.3 add64.3
MLINKS += int64.3 add64u.3
MLINKS += int64.3 add64ul.3
MLINKS += int64.3 sub64.3
MLINKS += int64.3 sub64u.3
MLINKS += int64.3 sub64ul.3
MLINKS += int64.3 diff64.3
MLINKS += int64.3 bsr64.3
MLINKS += int64.3 cvu64.3
MLINKS += int64.3 cvul64.3
MLINKS += int64.3 cv64u.3
MLINKS += int64.3 cv64ul.3
MLINKS += int64.3 div64.3
MLINKS += int64.3 div64u.3
MLINKS += int64.3 div64u64.3
MLINKS += int64.3 rem64.3
MLINKS += int64.3 rem64u.3
MLINKS += int64.3 mul64.3
MLINKS += int64.3 mul64u.3
MLINKS += int64.3 cmp64.3
MLINKS += int64.3 cmp64u.3
MLINKS += int64.3 cmp64ul.3
MLINKS += int64.3 ex64lo.3
MLINKS += int64.3 ex64hi.3
MLINKS += islessgreater.3 isgreater.3
MLINKS += islessgreater.3 isgreaterequal.3
MLINKS += islessgreater.3 isless.3
MLINKS += islessgreater.3 islessequal.3
MLINKS += ldexp.3 scalbn.3
MLINKS += ldexp.3 scalbnf.3
MLINKS += ldexp.3 scalbln.3
MLINKS += malloc.3 free.3
MLINKS += malloc.3 realloc.3
MLINKS += malloc.3 calloc.3
MLINKS += nearbyint.3 ceil.3
MLINKS += nearbyint.3 floor.3
MLINKS += printf.3 fprintf.3
MLINKS += printf.3 sprintf.3
MLINKS += printf.3 snprintf.3
MLINKS += printf.3 vprintf.3
MLINKS += printf.3 vfprintf.3
MLINKS += printf.3 vsprintf.3
MLINKS += putc.3 putchar.3
MLINKS += putc.3 fputc.3
MLINKS += random.3 srandom.3
MLINKS += random.3 initstate.3
MLINKS += rcmd.3 rresvport.3
MLINKS += regex.3 regcomp.3
MLINKS += regex.3 regexec.3
MLINKS += regex.3 regerror.3
MLINKS += resolver.3 res_query.3
MLINKS += resolver.3 res_search.3
MLINKS += resolver.3 res_mkquery.3
MLINKS += resolver.3 res_send.3
MLINKS += resolver.3 res_init.3
MLINKS += resolver.3 dn_comp.3
MLINKS += scanf.3 fscanf.3
MLINKS += scanf.3 sscanf.3
MLINKS += scanf.3 vscanf.3
MLINKS += scanf.3 vfscanf.3
MLINKS += setjmp.3 longjmp.3
MLINKS += setjmp.3 _setjmp.3
MLINKS += setjmp.3 _longjmp.3
MLINKS += setjmp.3 sigsetjmp.3
MLINKS += sigset.3 sigaddset.3
MLINKS += sigset.3 sigdelset.3
MLINKS += sigset.3 sigemptyset.3
MLINKS += sigset.3 sigfillset.3
MLINKS += string.3 strcat.3
MLINKS += string.3 strncat.3
MLINKS += string.3 strcmp.3
MLINKS += string.3 strncmp.3
MLINKS += string.3 strcpy.3
MLINKS += string.3 strncpy.3
MLINKS += string.3 strlen.3
MLINKS += string.3 strchr.3
MLINKS += string.3 strrchr.3
MLINKS += string.3 strerror.3
MLINKS += string.3 memcmp.3
MLINKS += string.3 memcpy.3
MLINKS += string.3 memmove.3
MLINKS += string.3 memchr.3
MLINKS += string.3 memset.3
MLINKS += string.3 index.3
MLINKS += strtol.3 strtoll.3
MLINKS += strtol.3 strtoul.3
MLINKS += syslog.3 openlog.3
MLINKS += termcap.3 tgetent.3
MLINKS += termcap.3 tgetnum.3
MLINKS += termcap.3 tgetflag.3
MLINKS += termcap.3 tgetstr.3
MLINKS += termcap.3 tgoto.3
MLINKS += termios.3 tcgetattr.3
MLINKS += termios.3 tcsetattr.3
MLINKS += termios.3 cfgetispeed.3
MLINKS += termios.3 cfgetospeed.3
MLINKS += termios.3 cfsetispeed.3
MLINKS += termios.3 cfsetospeed.3
MLINKS += termios.3 tcsendbreak.3
MLINKS += termios.3 tcdrain.3
MLINKS += termios.3 tcflush.3
.include <bsd.man.mk>
.include <bsd.subdir.mk>

27
man/man3/abort.3
View file

@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
.\" @(#)abort.3 6.3 (Berkeley) 5/27/86
.\"
.TH ABORT 3 "May 27, 1986"
.AT 3
.SH NAME
abort \- generate a fault
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <stdlib.h>
void abort(void)
.ft R
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
.B Abort
executes an instruction which is illegal in user mode.
This causes a signal that normally terminates
the process with a core dump, which may be used for debugging.
.SH SEE ALSO
.BR sigaction (2),
.BR exit (2).
.SH DIAGNOSTICS
Usually ``abort \- core dumped'' from the shell.
.SH BUGS
The abort() function does not flush standard I/O buffers. Use
.BR fflush (3).

24
man/man3/abs.3
View file

@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
.\" @(#)abs.3 6.1 (Berkeley) 5/15/85
.\"
.TH ABS 3 "May 15, 1985"
.AT 3
.SH NAME
abs \- integer absolute value
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <stdlib.h>
int abs(int \fIi\fP)
.ft R
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
.B Abs
returns the absolute value of its integer operand.
.SH SEE ALSO
.BR floor (3).
.SH BUGS
Applying the \fIabs\fP function to the most negative integer generates a
result which is the most negative integer. That is, abs(0x80000000)
returns 0x80000000 as a result on a machine with 32-bit ints. Using the
result in unsigned computations is sound however.

42
man/man3/assert.3
View file

@ -1,42 +0,0 @@
.\" @(#)assert.3 6.2 (Berkeley) 5/12/86
.\"
.TH ASSERT 3 "May 12, 1986"
.AT 3
.SH NAME
assert \- program verification
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <assert.h>
void assert(int \fIexpression\fP)
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
.B Assert
is a macro that indicates
.I expression
is expected to be true at this point in the program.
It causes an
.BR abort (3)
with a diagnostic comment on the standard output when
.I expression
is false (0).
Compiling with the
.BR cc (1)
option
.SM
.B \-DNDEBUG
effectively deletes
.B assert
from the program.
.SH DIAGNOSTICS
`Assertion "\fIexpression\fR" failed: file
.I f
line
.IR n .'
.I F
is the source file and
.I n
the source line number of the
.B assert
statement.

39
man/man3/atof.3
View file

@ -1,39 +0,0 @@
.\" @(#)atof.3 6.1 (Berkeley) 5/15/85
.\"
.TH ATOF 3 "May 15, 1985"
.AT 3
.SH NAME
atof, atoi, atol \- convert ASCII to numbers
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <stdlib.h>
double atof(const char *\fInptr\fP)
int atoi(const char *\fInptr\fP)
long atol(const char *\fInptr\fP)
.ft R
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
These functions convert a string pointed to by
.I nptr
to floating, integer, and long integer representation respectively.
The first unrecognized character ends the string.
.PP
.B Atof
recognizes an optional string of spaces, then an optional sign, then
a string of digits optionally containing a decimal
point, then an optional `e' or `E' followed by an optionally signed integer.
.PP
.B Atoi
and
.B atol
recognize an optional string of spaces, then an optional sign, then a
string of
digits.
.SH SEE ALSO
.BR strtol (3),
.BR strtod (3),
.BR scanf (3).
.SH BUGS
There are no provisions for overflow.

84
man/man3/bstring.3
View file

@ -1,84 +0,0 @@
.\" Copyright (c) 1983 Regents of the University of California.
.\" All rights reserved. The Berkeley software License Agreement
.\" specifies the terms and conditions for redistribution.
.\"
.\" @(#)bstring.3 6.1 (Berkeley) 5/15/85
.\"
.TH BSTRING 3 "May 15, 1985"
.UC 5
.SH NAME
bstring, bcopy, bcmp, bzero, ffs \- bit and byte string operations
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <unistd.h>
void bcopy(const void *\fIsrc\fP, void *\fIdst\fP, size_t \fIlength\fP)
int bcmp(const void *\fIb1\fP, const void *\fIb2\fP, size_t \fIlength\fP)
void bzero(void *\fIdst\fP, size_t \fIlength\fP)
int ffs(int \fIi\fP)
.ft R
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
The functions
.BR bcopy ,
.BR bcmp ,
and
.B bzero
operate on variable length strings of bytes.
They do not check for null bytes as the routines in
.BR string (3)
do.
.PP
.B Bcopy
copies
.I length
bytes from string
.I src
to the string
.IR dst .
.PP
.B Bcmp
compares byte string
.I b1
against byte string
.IR b2 ,
returning zero if they are identical,
non-zero otherwise. Both strings are
assumed to be
.I length
bytes long.
.PP
.B Bzero
places
.I length
0 bytes in the string
.IR b1 .
.PP
.B Ffs
find the first bit set in the argument passed it and
returns the index of that bit. Bits are numbered
starting at 1. A return value of 0 indicates the
value passed is zero.
.SH BUGS
The
.BR bcopy ,
.BR bcmp ,
and
.BR bzero
functions are obsolete; new code should use
.BR memmove ,
.BR memcmp ,
and
.BR memset
respectively.
.PP
The
.B bcopy
routine takes parameters backwards from
.BR memcpy ,
.BR memmove ,
and
.BR strcpy .

194
man/man3/configfile.3
View file

@ -1,194 +0,0 @@
.TH CONFIGFILE 3
.SH NAME
configfile, config_read, config_delete, config_renewed, config_length, config_issub, config_isatom, config_isstring \- generic configuration file functions
.SH SYNOPSIS
.ft B
.nf
#include <configfile.h>
config_t *config_read(const char *\fIfile\fP, int \fIflags\fP, config_t *\fIcfg\fP)
void config_delete(config_t *\fIcfg\fP)
int config_renewed(config_t *\fIcfg\fP)
size_t config_length(config_t *\fIcfg\fP)
int config_issub(config_t *\fIcfg\fP)
int config_isatom(config_t *\fIcfg\fP)
int config_isstring(config_t *\fIcfg\fP)
.fi
.ft P
.SH DESCRIPTION
The
.B configfile
routines operate on a generic configuration file that follows the syntax
described in
.BR configfile (5).
.PP
The interface presented by the functions above uses the following type and
definitions from <configfile.h>:
.PP
.if n .in +2
.if t .RS
.nf
.ta +\w'type'u +\w'const charmm'u +\w'word[];mm'u
typedef const struct config {
config_t *next; /* Next configuration file thing. */
config_t *list; /* For a { sublist }. */
const char *file; /* File and line where this is found. */
unsigned line;
int flags; /* Special flags. */
char word[]; /* Payload. */
} config_t;
.ta +\w'#definem'u +\w'CFG_SUBLISTm'u +\w'0x0000mm'u
#define CFG_CLONG 0x0001 /* strtol(word, &end, 0) is valid. */
#define CFG_OLONG 0x0002 /* strtol(word, &end, 010). */
#define CFG_DLONG 0x0004 /* strtol(word, &end, 10). */
#define CFG_XLONG 0x0008 /* strtol(word, &end, 0x10). */
#define CFG_CULONG 0x0010 /* strtoul(word, &end, 0). */
#define CFG_OULONG 0x0020 /* strtoul(word, &end, 010). */
#define CFG_DULONG 0x0040 /* strtoul(word, &end, 10). */
#define CFG_XULONG 0x0080 /* strtoul(word, &end, 0x10). */
#define CFG_STRING 0x0100 /* The word is enclosed in quotes. */
#define CFG_SUBLIST 0x0200 /* This is a sublist, so no word. */
#define CFG_ESCAPED 0x0400 /* Escapes are still marked with \e. */
.fi
.if n .in -2
.if t .RE
.PP
In memory a configuration file is represented as a list of
.B config_t
cells linked together with the
.B next
field ending with a null pointer. A sublist between braces is attached to a
cell at the
.B list
field.
Words and strings are put in the
.B word
field, a null terminated string. The
.B flags
field records the type and features of a cell. The
.B CFG_*LONG
flags are set if a word is a number according to one of the
.B strtol
or
.B strtoul
calls. Purely a number, no quotes or trailing garbage. The
.B CFG_STRING
flag is set if the object was enclosed in double quotes. Lastly
.B CFG_SUBLIST
tells if the cell is only a pointer to a sublist in braces.
.PP
Characters in a word or string may have been formed with the
.B \e
escape character. They have been parsed and expanded, but the \e is still
present if
.B CFG_ESCAPED
is set. The
.B word
array may be changed, as long as it doesn't grow longer, so one may remove
the \es like this:
.PP
.RS
.ta +4n +4n
.nf
if (cfg->flags & CFG_ESCAPED) {
char *p, *q;
p= q= cfg->word;
for (;;) {
if ((*q = *p) == '\e\e') *q = *++p;
if (*q == 0) break;
p++;
q++;
}
}
.fi
.RE
.PP
The low level syntax of a config file is checked when it is read. If an
error is encountered a message is printed and the program exits with exit
code 1. What the data means is not checked, that
should be done by the program using the data. Only the atom
.B include
at the beginning of a list is special. It should be followed by a string.
The string is seen as the name of a file, that is opened, read, and inserted
in place of the
.BR include .
Unless the name of the file starts with a
.BR / ,
it is sought relative to the directory the current file is found in.
Nonexistent files are treated as being empty.
.PP
The
.B file
and
.B line
fields in each cell tell where the cell was read.
.SS Functions
A configuration file is read with
.BR config_read .
The first argument is the file to read. The second is either
.B 0
or
.B CFG_ESCAPED
to tell whether \e escapes should be fully expanded without leaving a trace,
or if they should still be marked with a \e so that the caller knows where
the excapes are.
The third argument,
.IR cfg ,
should be a null pointer on the first call. If you want to reread a config
file that may have changed then
.I cfg
should be what you previously read.
.PP
With
.B config_delete
one can free up the memory that has been acquired with
.BR malloc (3)
to hold the contents of the configuration file.
.PP
To determine if the contents of configuration file has changed when reread
one uses
.BR config_renewed
after
.BR config_read .
It returns a "changed" flag that is set when the configuration file changed
and then clears that flag. It returns true on the very first call. For the
function to work you need to feed the old data back into
.BR config_read ,
not delete and reread.
.PP
The length of a series of config structures is told by
.BR config_length .
It follows the
.B next
fields, so a sublist between braces counts as one extra.
.PP
The
.BR config_issub ,
.BR config_isatom
and
.BR config_isstring
functions are just pretty macros to test if a cell references a sublist, is
a word/string, or is just a string.
.B CFG_SUBLIST
and
.B CFG_STRING
tell the same story.
.SH FILES
.TP \w'*/etc/*.confmmmm'u
.B */etc/*.conf
Several files in several
.B etc
directories.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR configfile (5).
.SH NOTES
The syntax of a config file puts some constraints on what you find in memory.
The top level list consists entirely of sublist cells. These point to lists
that start with at least an atom, followed by a mix of atoms and sublist cells.
These sublists in turn point to a list of only sublist cells (recurse now.)
.PP
The struct config shown above is not exactly proper C to aid
readability, read <configfile.h> itself to see why.
.SH AUTHOR
Kees J. Bot (kjb@cs.vu.nl)

71
man/man3/crypt.3
View file

@ -1,71 +0,0 @@
.TH CRYPT 3
.SH NAME
crypt \- one-way password encryption function
.SH SYNOPSIS
.ft B
.nf
#define _MINIX_SOURCE 1
#include <unistd.h>
char *crypt(const char *\fIkey\fP, const char *\fIsalt\fP)
.fi
.ft P
.SH DESCRIPTION
The first use of
.B crypt()
is to encrypt a password. Its second use is to authenticate a shadow
password. In both cases
.B crypt()
calls
.BR pwdauth (8)
to do the real work.
.PP
.B Crypt()
encrypts a password if called with a user typed key, and a salt
whose first two characters are in the set [./0-9A-Za-z]. The result is a
character string in the [./0-9A-Za-z] alphabet of which the first two
characters are equal to the salt, and the rest is the result of encrypting
the key and the salt.
.PP
If
.B crypt()
is called with a salt that has the form
.BI "##" user
then the key is encrypted and compared to the encrypted password of
.I user
in the shadow password file. If they are equal then
.B crypt()
returns the
.BI "##" user
argument, if not then some other string is returned. This trick assures
that the normal way to authenticate a password still works:
.PP
.RS
.nf
if (strcmp(pw->pw_passwd, crypt(key, pw->pw_passwd))) ...
.fi
.RE
.PP
If
.I key
is a null string, and the shadow password is a null string or the salt is a
null string then the result equals
.IR salt .
(This is because the caller can't tell if a password field is empty in the
shadow password file.)
.PP
The key and salt are limited to 1024 bytes total including the null bytes.
.SH FILES
.TP 25
/usr/lib/pwdauth
The password authentication program
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR getpass (3),
.BR getpwent (3),
.BR passwd (5),
.BR pwdauth (8).
.SH NOTES
The result of an encryption is returned in a static array that is
overwritten by each call. The return value should not be modified.
.SH AUTHOR
Kees J. Bot (kjb@cs.vu.nl)

109
man/man3/ctime.3
View file

@ -1,109 +0,0 @@
.\" Copyright (c) 1980 Regents of the University of California.
.\" All rights reserved. The Berkeley software License Agreement
.\" specifies the terms and conditions for redistribution.
.\"
.\" @(#)ctime.3 6.8 (Berkeley) 4/2/87
.\"
.TH CTIME 3 "April 2, 1987"
.UC 4
.SH NAME
ctime, localtime, gmtime, asctime, tzset \- convert date and time to ASCII
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <time.h>
void tzset(void)
char *ctime(const time_t *\fIclock\fP)
char *asctime(const struct tm *\fItm\fP)
struct tm *localtime(const time_t *\fIclock\fP)
struct tm *gmtime(const time_t *\fIclock\fP)
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
\fBTzset\fP uses the value of the environment variable \fBTZ\fP to
set up the time conversion information used by \fBlocaltime\fP.
.PP
If \fBTZ\fP does not appear in the environment, the \fBTZDEFAULT\fP
file (as defined in \fI<tzfile.h>\fP) is used by \fBlocaltime\fP. If
this file fails for any reason, the GMT offset as provided by the
kernel is used. In this case, DST is ignored, resulting in the time
being incorrect by some amount if DST is currently in effect. If
this fails for any reason, GMT is used.
.PP
If \fBTZ\fP appears in the environment but its value is a null string,
Greenwich Mean Time is used; if \fBTZ\fP appears and begins with a
slash, it is used as the absolute pathname of the \fBtzfile\fP(5)-format
file from which to read the time conversion information; if \fBTZ\fP
appears and begins with a character other than a slash, it's used as
a pathname relative to the system time conversion information directory,
defined as \fBTZDIR\fP in the include file \fBtzfile.h\fP. If this file
fails for any reason, the GMT offset as provided by the kernel is
used, as described above. If this fails for any reason, GMT is used.
See
.BR TZ (5)
for a proper description of the
.B TZ
variable.
.PP
\fBCtime\fP converts a time value, pointed to by \fIclock\fP,
such as returned by \fBtime\fP(2) into ASCII and returns a pointer
to a 26-character string in the following form. All the fields
have constant width.
.PP
.RS
.nf
Sun Sep 16 01:03:52 1973\en\e0
.fi
.RE
.PP
.B Localtime
and
.B gmtime
return pointers to structures containing
the broken-down time.
.B Localtime
corrects for the time zone and possible daylight savings time;
.B gmtime
converts directly to GMT, which is the time UNIX uses.
.B Asctime
converts a broken-down time to ASCII and returns a pointer
to a 26-character string.
.PP
The structure declaration from the include file is:
.PP
.RS
.nf
.nr .0 .8i+\w'int tm_isdst'u
.ta .5i \n(.0u \n(.0u+\w'/* 0-000'u+1n
struct tm {
int tm_sec; /* 0-59 seconds */
int tm_min; /* 0-59 minutes */
int tm_hour; /* 0-23 hour */
int tm_mday; /* 1-31 day of month */
int tm_mon; /* 0-11 month */
int tm_year; /* 0- year \- 1900 */
int tm_wday; /* 0-6 day of week (Sunday = 0) */
int tm_yday; /* 0-365 day of year */
int tm_isdst; /* flag: daylight savings time in effect */
};
.fi
.RE
.PP
\fBTm_isdst\fP is non-zero if a time zone adjustment such as Daylight
Savings time is in effect.
.SH FILES
.ta \w'/usr/lib/zoneinfo\0\0'u
/usr/lib/zoneinfo time zone information directory
.br
/etc/localtime local time zone file
.SH SEE ALSO
.BR time (2),
.BR getenv (3),
.BR tzfile (5),
.BR TZ (5),
.BR environ (7),
.BR zic (8).
.SH NOTE
The return values point to static data whose content is overwritten by
each call.

95
man/man3/ctype.3
View file

@ -1,95 +0,0 @@
.\" @(#)ctype.3 6.4 (Berkeley) 5/12/86
.\"
.TH CTYPE 3 "May 12, 1986"
.AT 3
.SH NAME
ctype, isalpha, isupper, islower, isdigit, isxdigit, isalnum, isspace, ispunct, isprint, isgraph, iscntrl, isascii, toupper, tolower, toascii \- character classification macros
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <ctype.h>
int isalpha(int \fIc\fP)
\&...
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
These macros classify characters
by table lookup.
Each is a predicate returning nonzero for true,
zero for false.
.B Isascii
and
.B toascii
are defined on all integer values; the rest
are defined only on the range of
.B "unsigned char"
and on the special value
EOF (see
.BR stdio (3)).
.TP 15n
.B isalpha
.I c
is a letter
.TP
.B isupper
.I c
is an upper case letter
.TP
.B islower
.I c
is a lower case letter
.TP
.B isdigit
.I c
is a digit
.TP
.B isxdigit
.I c
is a hex digit
.TP
.B isalnum
.I c
is an alphanumeric character
.TP
.B isspace
.I c
is a space, tab, carriage return, newline, vertical tab, or formfeed
.TP
.B ispunct
.I c
is a punctuation character (neither control nor alphanumeric)
.TP
.B isprint
.I c
is a printing character, code 040(8) (space) through 0176 (tilde)
.TP
.B isgraph
.I c
is a printing character, similar to
.B isprint
except false for space.
.TP
.B iscntrl
.I c
is a delete character (0177) or ordinary control character
(less than 040).
.TP
.B isascii
.I c
is an ASCII character, code less than 0200
.TP
.B tolower
.I c
is converted to lower case. Return value is undefined if not
.BR isupper (\fIc\fR).
.TP
.B toupper
.I c
is converted to upper case. Return value is undefined if not
.BR islower (\fIc\fR).
.TP
.B toascii
.I c
is converted to be a valid ascii character.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR ascii (7)

89
man/man3/directory.3
View file

@ -1,89 +0,0 @@
.TH DIRECTORY 3
.SH NAME
directory, opendir, readdir, rewinddir, closedir, telldir, seekdir \- directory routines
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <dirent.h>
DIR *opendir(const char *\fIdirname\fP)
struct dirent *readdir(DIR *\fIdirp\fP)
void rewinddir(DIR *\fIdirp\fP)
int closedir(DIR *\fIdirp\fP)
#define _MINIX 1
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <dirent.h>
long telldir(DIR *\fIdirp\fP)
int seekdir(DIR *\fIdirp\fP, long \fIpos\fP)
.SH DESCRIPTION
These routines form a system independent interface to access directories.
.PP
.B Opendir()
opens the directory
.I dirname
and returns a pointer to this open directory stream.
.PP
.B Readdir()
reads one entry from the directory as a pointer to a structure containing
the field
.BR d_name ,
a character array containing the null-terminated name of the entry.
.PP
.B Rewinddir()
allows the directory to be read again from the beginning.
.PP
.B Closedir()
closes the directory and releases administrative data.
.PP
The MINIX 3 specific functions
.B telldir()
and
.B seekdir()
allow one to get the current position in the directory file and to return
there later.
.B Seekdir()
may only be called with a position returned by
.B telldir()
or 0 (rewind). These functions should not be used in portable programs.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR dir (5).
.SH DIAGNOSTICS
.B Opendir()
returns a null pointer if
.I dirname
can't be opened, or if it can't allocate enough memory for the
.B DIR
structure.
.PP
.B Readdir()
returns null if there are no more directory entries or on error.
.PP
.B Closedir()
and
.B seekdir()
returns 0 on success, -1 on error.
.PP
.B Telldir()
returns -1 on error.
.PP
All of them set
.B errno
appropriately.
.B Readdir()
will only set
.B errno
on error, not on end-of-dir, so you should set
.B errno
to zero beforehand, and check its value if
.B readdir()
returns null.
.SH NOTES
The return value of
.B readdir()
needs to be copied before the next operation on the same directory if it is
to be saved.
.SH AUTHOR
Kees J. Bot (kjb@cs.vu.nl)

19
man/man3/dirname.3
View file

@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
.TH DIRNAME 3
.SH NAME
dirname \- determine name of containing directory
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <libgen.h>
char *dirname(char *\fIpath\fP);
.SH DESCRIPTION
The dirname function returns the name of the directory containing \fIpath\fP.
If the path does not contain slashes, the string "." is returned. Trailing
slashes are ignored.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR basename (3).
.SH NOTES
This function may, but need not, overwrite the buffer passed to it.
Although MINIX' implementation of this function is re-entrant, POSIX does not
guarantee this property and portable programs should not rely on it.

168
man/man3/editline.3
View file

@ -1,168 +0,0 @@
.TH EDITLINE 3
.SH NAME
editline \- command-line editing library with history
.SH SYNOPSIS
.ft B
char *readline(char *\fIprompt\fP)
.ft P
.SH DESCRIPTION
.I Editline
is a library that provides an line-editing interface with text recall.
It is intended to be compatible with the
.I readline
library provided by the Free Software Foundation, but much smaller.
The bulk of this manual page describes the user interface.
.PP
The
.I readline
routine returns a line of text with the trailing newline removed.
The data is returned in a buffer allocated with
.IR malloc (3),
so the space should be released with
.IR free (3)
when the calling program is done with it.
Before accepting input from the user, the specified
.I prompt
is displayed on the terminal.
.PP
Each line returned is copied to the internal history list, unless it happens
to be equal to the previous line.
.SS "User Interface"
A program that uses this library provides a simple emacs-like editing
interface to its users.
A line may be edited before it is sent to the calling program by typing either
control characters or escape sequences.
A control character, shown as a caret followed by a letter, is typed by
holding down the ``control'' key while the letter is typed.
For example, ``^A'' is a control-A.
An escape sequence is entered by typing the ``escape'' key followed by one or
more characters.
The escape key is abbreviated as ``ESC.''
Note that unlike control keys, case matters in escape sequences; ``ESC\ F''
is not the same as ``ESC\ f''.
.PP
An editing command may be typed anywhere on the line, not just at the
beginning.
In addition, a return may also be typed anywhere on the line, not just at
the end.
.PP
Most editing commands may be given a repeat count,
.IR n ,
where
.I n
is a number.
To enter a repeat count, type the escape key, the number, and then
the command to execute.
For example, ``ESC\ 4\ ^f'' moves forward four characters.
If a command may be given a repeat count then the text ``[n]'' is given at the
end of its description.
.PP
The following control characters are accepted:
.RS
.nf
.ta \w'ESC DEL 'u
^A Move to the beginning of the line
^B Move left (backwards) [n]
^D Delete character [n]
^E Move to end of line
^F Move right (forwards) [n]
^G Ring the bell
^H Delete character before cursor (backspace key) [n]
^I Complete filename (tab key); see below
^J Done with line (return key)
^K Kill to end of line (or column [n])
^L Redisplay line
^M Done with line (alternate return key)
^N Get next line from history [n]
^P Get previous line from history [n]
^R Search backward (forward if [n]) through history for text;
\& must start line if text begins with an uparrow
^T Transpose characters
^V Insert next character, even if it is an edit command
^W Wipe to the mark
^X^X Exchange current location and mark
^Y Yank back last killed text
^[ Start an escape sequence (escape key)
^]c Move forward to next character ``c''
^? Delete character before cursor (delete key) [n]
.fi
.RE
.PP
The following escape sequences are provided.
.RS
.nf
.ta \w'ESC DEL 'u
ESC\ ^H Delete previous word (backspace key) [n]
ESC\ DEL Delete previous word (delete key) [n]
ESC\ SP Set the mark (space key); see ^X^X and ^Y above
ESC\ \. Get the last (or [n]'th) word from previous line
ESC\ ? Show possible completions; see below
ESC\ < Move to start of history
ESC\ > Move to end of history
ESC\ b Move backward a word [n]
ESC\ d Delete word under cursor [n]
ESC\ f Move forward a word [n]
ESC\ l Make word lowercase [n]
ESC\ m Toggle if 8bit chars display normally or with ``M\-'' prefix
ESC\ u Make word uppercase [n]
ESC\ y Yank back last killed text
ESC\ v Show library version
ESC\ w Make area up to mark yankable
ESC\ nn Set repeat count to the number nn
ESC\ C Read from environment variable ``_C_'', where C is
\& an uppercase letter
.fi
.RE
.PP
The
.I editline
library has a small macro facility.
If you type the escape key followed by an uppercase letter,
.IR C ,
then the contents of the environment variable
.I _C_
are read in as if you had typed them at the keyboard.
For example, if the variable
.I _L_
contains the following:
.RS
^A^Kecho '^V^[[H^V^[[2J'^M
.RE
Then typing ``ESC L'' will move to the beginning of the line, kill the
entire line, enter the echo command needed to clear the terminal (if your
terminal is like a VT-100), and send the line back to the shell.
.PP
The
.I editline
library also does filename completion.
Suppose the root directory has the following files in it:
.RS
.nf
.ta \w'core 'u
bin vmunix
core vmunix.old
.fi
.RE
If you type ``rm\ /v'' and then the tab key.
.I Editline
will then finish off as much of the name as possible by adding ``munix''.
Because the name is not unique, it will then beep.
If you type the escape key and a question mark, it will display the
two choices.
If you then type a period and a tab, the library will finish off the filename
for you:
.RS
.nf
.RI "rm /v[TAB]" munix .TAB old
.fi
.RE
The tab key is shown by ``[TAB]'' and the automatically-entered text
is shown in italics.
.SH "BUGS AND LIMITATIONS"
Doesn't know how to handle multiple lines.
.SH AUTHORS
Simmule R. Turner <uunet.uu.net!capitol!sysgo!simmy>
and Rich $alz <rsalz@osf.org>.
Original manual page by DaviD W. Sanderson <dws@ssec.wisc.edu>.
.\" $PchId: editline.3,v 1.3 1996/02/22 21:18:51 philip Exp $

42
man/man3/end.3
View file

@ -1,42 +0,0 @@
.\" @(#)end.3 6.2 (Berkeley) 5/12/86
.\"
.TH END 3 "May 12, 1986"
.AT 3
.SH NAME
end, etext, edata \- last locations in program
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
extern int etext;
extern int edata;
extern int end, _end;
.ft R
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
These names refer neither to routines nor to locations with interesting
contents. The address of
.B etext
is the first address above the program text,
.B edata
above the initialized data region, and
.B end
above the uninitialized data region.
.B _end
is the same as
.BR end ,
but in the implementers name space, i.e. for use in libraries.
.PP
When execution begins, the program break coincides with
.BR end ,
but it is reset by the routines
.BR brk (2),
.BR malloc (3),
standard input/output
.RB ( stdio (3)),
etc.
The current value of the program break is reliably returned by `sbrk(0)',
see
.BR brk (2).
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR brk (2),
.BR malloc (3).

196
man/man3/execl.3
View file

@ -1,196 +0,0 @@
.\" Copyright (c) 1983 Regents of the University of California.
.\" All rights reserved. The Berkeley software License Agreement
.\" specifies the terms and conditions for redistribution.
.\"
.\" @(#)execl.3 6.2 (Berkeley) 4/25/86
.\"
.TH EXECL 3 "April 25, 1986"
.UC 5
.SH NAME
execl, execv, execle, execlp, execvp, exec, environ \- execute a file
.SH SYNOPSIS
.ft B
#include <unistd.h>
.in +.5i
.ti -.5i
int execl(const char *\fIname\fP, const char *\fIarg0\fP, ..., (char *) NULL)
.ti -.5i
int execv(const char *\fIname\fP, char *const \fIargv\fP[])
.ti -.5i
int execle(const char *\fIname\fP, const char *\fIarg0\fP, ..., (char *) NULL, char *const \fIenvp\fP[])
.ti -.5i
int execlp(const char *\fIname\fP, const char *\fIarg0\fP, ..., (char *) NULL)
.ti -.5i
int execvp(const char *\fIname\fP, char *const \fIargv\fP[])
.in -.5i
extern char *const *environ;
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
These routines provide various interfaces to the
.B execve
system call. Refer to
.BR execve (2)
for a description of their properties; only
brief descriptions are provided here.
.PP
.B Exec
in all its forms
overlays the calling process with the named file, then
transfers to the
entry point of the core image of the file.
There can be no return from a successful exec; the calling
core image is lost.
.PP
The
.I name
argument
is a pointer to the name of the file
to be executed.
The pointers
.IR arg [ 0 ],
.IR arg [ 1 "] ..."
address null-terminated strings.
Conventionally
.IR arg [ 0 ]
is the name of the
file.
.PP
Two interfaces are available.
.B execl
is useful when a known file with known arguments is
being called;
the arguments to
.B execl
are the character strings
constituting the file and the arguments;
the first argument is conventionally
the same as the file name (or its last component).
A null pointer argument must end the argument list.
(Note that the
.B execl*
functions are variable argument functions. This means that the type
of the arguments beyond
.I arg0
is not checked. So the null pointer requires an explicit cast to type
.B "(char *)"
if not of that type already.)
.PP
The
.B execv
version is useful when the number of arguments is unknown
in advance;
the arguments to
.B execv
are the name of the file to be
executed and a vector of strings containing
the arguments.
The last argument string must be followed
by a null pointer.
.PP
When a C program is executed,
it is called as follows:
.PP
.RS
.ft B
.nf
int main(int \fIargc\fP, char *const \fIargv\fP[], char *const \fIenvp\fP[]);
exit(main(\fIargc\fP, \fIargv\fP, \fIenvp\fP));
.fi
.ft R
.RE
.PP
where
.I argc
is the argument count
and
.I argv
is an array of character pointers
to the arguments themselves.
As indicated,
.I argc
is conventionally at least one
and the first member of the array points to a
string containing the name of the file.
.PP
.I Argv
is directly usable in another
.B execv
because
.IR argv [ argc ]
is 0.
.PP
.I Envp
is a pointer to an array of strings that constitute
the
.I environment
of the process.
Each string consists of a name, an \*(lq=\*(rq, and a null-terminated value.
The array of pointers is terminated by a null pointer.
The shell
.BR sh (1)
passes an environment entry for each global shell variable
defined when the program is called.
See
.BR environ (7)
for some conventionally
used names.
The C run-time start-off routine places a copy of
.I envp
in the global cell
.BR environ ,
which is used
by
.B execv
and
.B execl
to pass the environment to any subprograms executed by the
current program.
.PP
.B Execlp
and
.B execvp
are called with the same arguments as
.B execl
and
.BR execv ,
but duplicate the shell's actions in searching for an executable
file in a list of directories.
The directory list is obtained from the environment variable
.BR PATH .
Under standard MINIX 3, if a file is found that is executable, but does
not have the proper executable header then it is assumed to be
a shell script.
.B Execlp
and
.B execvp
execute
.B /bin/sh
to interpret the script.
Under Minix-vmd this does not happen, a script must begin with
.B #!
and the full path name of the interpreter if it is to be an
executable script.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR execve (2),
.BR fork (2),
.BR environ (7),
.BR sh (1).
.SH DIAGNOSTICS
If the file cannot be found,
if it is not executable,
if it does not start with a valid magic number (see
.BR a.out (5)),
if maximum memory is exceeded,
or if the arguments require too much space,
a return
constitutes the diagnostic;
the return value is \-1 and
.B errno
is set as for
.BR execve .
Even for the super-user,
at least one of the execute-permission bits must be set for
a file to be executed.

39
man/man3/exit.3
View file

@ -1,39 +0,0 @@
.\" Copyright (c) 1983 Regents of the University of California.
.\" All rights reserved. The Berkeley software License Agreement
.\" specifies the terms and conditions for redistribution.
.\"
.\" @(#)exit.3 6.2 (Berkeley) 5/12/86
.\"
.TH EXIT 3 "May 12, 1986"
.UC 5
.SH NAME
exit, atexit \- terminate a process after flushing any pending output
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <stdlib.h>
void exit(int \fIstatus\fP)
int atexit(void (*\fIfunc\fP)(void))
.ft R
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
.B Exit
first calls all functions registered by
.BR atexit ,
flushes all data buffered by the Standard I/O library, and finally
terminates the process.
.B Exit
never returns.
.PP
.B Atexit
registers the function
.I func
into a table of functions to be called on exit.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR exit (2).
.SH DIAGNOSTICS
.B Atexit
returns 0 on success, \-1 if
.B malloc
cannot allocate more memory for the list of registered functions.

18
man/man3/fabs.3
View file

@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
.TH FABS 3 "January 7, 2010"
.UC 4
.SH NAME
fabs, fabsf \- compute absolute value
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <math.h>
double fabs(double \fIx\fP);
float fabsf(float \fIx\fP);
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
\fBfabs\fP and \fBfabsf\fP return the absolute value of their argument.
.SH "RETURN VALUE
The return value is a number with the same magnitude as the argument and with
a positive sign.

45
man/man3/fclose.3
View file

@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
.\" @(#)fclose.3s 6.1 (Berkeley) 5/15/85
.\"
.TH FCLOSE 3 "May 15, 1985"
.AT 3
.SH NAME
fclose, fflush \- close or flush a stream
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <stdio.h>
int fclose(FILE *\fIstream\fP)
int fflush(FILE *\fIstream\fP)
.ft R
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
.B Fclose
causes any buffers for the named
.I stream
to be emptied, and the file to be closed.
Buffers allocated by the standard input/output system
are freed.
.PP
.B Fclose
is performed automatically upon
calling
.BR exit (3).
.PP
.B Fflush
causes any buffered data for the named output
.I stream
to be written to that file.
The stream remains open.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR close (2),
.BR fopen (3),
.BR setbuf (3).
.SH DIAGNOSTICS
These routines return
.SM
.B EOF
if
.I stream
is not associated with an output file, or
if buffered data cannot be transferred to that file.

28
man/man3/feholdexcept.3
View file

@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
.TH FEHOLDEXCEPT 3 "December 22, 2009"
.UC 4
.SH NAME
feholdexcept \- disable floating point exceptions
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <fenv.h>
int feholdexcept(fenv_t *\fIenvp\fP);
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
The feholdexcept function disables floating point exceptions. The floating
point environment prior to disabling exceptions is stored in the struct
pointed to by \fIenvp\fP.
.SH "RETURN VALUE"
On x86, this function never fails and the return value is always 0. A portable
program should, however, consider the possibility that this function may fail
and will return -1 to indicate this.
.SH "KNOWN ISSUES"
POSIX requires the function to clear exception flags. However, as none of the
other functions dealing with FPU flags and FPU state have been implemented this
has no effect on MINIX. A full implementation may need to store more FPU state
as there is no instruction to change the status word independent of the rest
of the FPU state. Do not depend on the fields of fenv_t as they may change even
on future versions of MINIX/x86.

58
man/man3/ferror.3
View file

@ -1,58 +0,0 @@
.\" Copyright (c) 1980 Regents of the University of California.
.\" All rights reserved. The Berkeley software License Agreement
.\" specifies the terms and conditions for redistribution.
.\"
.\" @(#)ferror.3s 6.3 (Berkeley) 5/14/86
.\"
.TH FERROR 3 "May 14, 1986"
.UC 4
.SH NAME
ferror, feof, clearerr, fileno \- stream status inquiries
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <stdio.h>
int feof(FILE *\fIstream\fP)
int ferror(FILE *\fIstream\fP)
int clearerr(FILE *\fIstream\fP)
int fileno(FILE *\fIstream\fP)
.ft R
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
.B Feof
returns non-zero when end of file is read on the named input
.IR stream ,
otherwise zero.
Unless cleared by
.BR clearerr ,
the end-of-file indication lasts until
the stream is closed.
.PP
.B Ferror
returns non-zero when an error has occurred reading or writing
the named
.IR stream ,
otherwise zero.
Unless cleared by
.BR clearerr ,
the error indication lasts until
the stream is closed.
.PP
.B Clearerr
resets the error and end-of-file indicators on the named
.IR stream .
.PP
.B Fileno
returns the integer file descriptor
associated with the
.IR stream ,
see
.BR open (2).
.PP
Currently all of these functions
are implemented as macros;
they cannot be redeclared.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR fopen (3),
.BR open (2).

34
man/man3/fesetround.3
View file

@ -1,34 +0,0 @@
.TH FESETROUND 3 "December 18, 2009"
.UC 4
.SH NAME
fesetround, fegetround \- floating point rounding mode control
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <fenv.h>
int fegetround(void);
int fesetround(int \fIround\fP);
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
These functions control the floating point rounding mode. One can use
fegetround to determine the rounding mode currently in effect and fesetround
the change the rounding mode. Four rounding modes are recognized: FE_TONEAREST,
FE_DOWNWARD, FE_UPWARD and FE_TOWARDZERO. When rounding a value \fIx\fP to an
integer \fIn\fP, the following approaches can be taken: FE_TONEAREST selects
the \fIn\fP for which abs(fIx\fP - \fIn\fP) is minimal, preferring an even
\fIn\fP if there are two possibilities; FE_DOWNWARD selects the largest \fIn\fP
for which \fIn\fP <= fIx\fP; FE_UPWARD selects the smallest \fIn\fP for which
\fIn\fP >= fIx\fP; and FE_TOWARDZERO selects \fIn\fP with the largest
abs(\fIn\fP) for which abs(\fIn\fP) <= abs(\fIx\fP).
.SH "RETURN VALUE"
fegetround returns the current rounding mode. fesetround returns 0 if it was
succesful in adjusting the rounding mode and -1 otherwise. The only possible
reason for failure is an unsupported value for \fIround\fP, which is signalled
by setting errno to EINVAL.
.SH DIAGNOSTICS
fegetround always succeeds. The only possible reason for failure of fesetround
is an unsupported value for \fIround\fP, which is signalled by setting errno to
EINVAL.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
nearbyint(3)

781
man/man3/fetch.3
View file

@ -1,781 +0,0 @@
.\"-
.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2004 Dag-Erling Coïdan Smørgrav
.\" Copyright (c) 2010 Joerg Sonnenberger <joerg@NetBSD.org>
.\" All rights reserved.
.\"
.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
.\" are met:
.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
.\"
.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
.\"
.\" $FreeBSD: fetch.3,v 1.64 2007/12/18 11:03:26 des Exp $
.\" $NetBSD: fetch.3,v 1.15 2010/01/22 13:56:45 wiz Exp $
.\"
.Dd January 22, 2010
.Dt FETCH 3
.Os
.Sh NAME
.Nm fetchMakeURL ,
.Nm fetchParseURL ,
.Nm fetchCopyURL ,
.Nm fetchFreeURL ,
.Nm fetchXGetURL ,
.Nm fetchGetURL ,
.Nm fetchPutURL ,
.Nm fetchStatURL ,
.Nm fetchListURL ,
.Nm fetchXGet ,
.Nm fetchGet ,
.Nm fetchPut ,
.Nm fetchStat ,
.Nm fetchList ,
.Nm fetchXGetFile ,
.Nm fetchGetFile ,
.Nm fetchPutFile ,
.Nm fetchStatFile ,
.Nm fetchListFile ,
.Nm fetchXGetHTTP ,
.Nm fetchGetHTTP ,
.Nm fetchPutHTTP ,
.Nm fetchStatHTTP ,
.Nm fetchListHTTP ,
.Nm fetchXGetFTP ,
.Nm fetchGetFTP ,
.Nm fetchPutFTP ,
.Nm fetchStatFTP ,
.Nm fetchListFTP
.Nm fetchInitURLList ,
.Nm fetchFreeURLList ,
.Nm fetchUnquotePath ,
.Nm fetchUnquoteFilename ,
.Nm fetchStringifyURL ,
.Nm fetchConnectionCacheInit ,
.Nm fetchConnectionCacheClose ,
.Nm fetch
.Nd file transfer functions
.Sh LIBRARY
.Lb libfetch
.Sh SYNOPSIS
.In stdio.h
.In fetch.h
.Ft struct url *
.Fn fetchMakeURL "const char *scheme" "const char *host" "int port" "const char *doc" "const char *user" "const char *pwd"
.Ft struct url *
.Fn fetchParseURL "const char *URL"
.Ft struct url *
.Fn fetchCopyURL "const struct url *u"
.Ft void
.Fn fetchFreeURL "struct url *u"
.Ft fetchIO *
.Fn fetchXGetURL "const char *URL" "struct url_stat *us" "const char *flags"
.Ft fetchIO *
.Fn fetchGetURL "const char *URL" "const char *flags"
.Ft fetchIO *
.Fn fetchPutURL "const char *URL" "const char *flags"
.Ft int
.Fn fetchStatURL "const char *URL" "struct url_stat *us" "const char *flags"
.Ft int
.Fn fetchListURL "struct url_list *list" "const char *URL" "const char *flags"
.Ft fetchIO *
.Fn fetchXGet "struct url *u" "struct url_stat *us" "const char *flags"
.Ft fetchIO *
.Fn fetchGet "struct url *u" "const char *flags"
.Ft fetchIO *
.Fn fetchPut "struct url *u" "const char *flags"
.Ft int
.Fn fetchStat "struct url *u" "struct url_stat *us" "const char *flags"
.Ft int
.Fn fetchList "struct url_list *list" "struct url *u" "const char *flags"
.Ft fetchIO *
.Fn fetchXGetFile "struct url *u" "struct url_stat *us" "const char *flags"
.Ft fetchIO *
.Fn fetchGetFile "struct url *u" "const char *flags"
.Ft fetchIO *
.Fn fetchPutFile "struct url *u" "const char *flags"
.Ft int
.Fn fetchStatFile "struct url *u" "struct url_stat *us" "const char *flags"
.Ft int
.Fn fetchListFile "struct url_list *list" "struct url *u" "const char *flags"
.Ft fetchIO *
.Fn fetchXGetHTTP "struct url *u" "struct url_stat *us" "const char *flags"
.Ft fetchIO *
.Fn fetchGetHTTP "struct url *u" "const char *flags"
.Ft fetchIO *
.Fn fetchPutHTTP "struct url *u" "const char *flags"
.Ft int
.Fn fetchStatHTTP "struct url *u" "struct url_stat *us" "const char *flags"
.Ft int
.Fn fetchListHTTP "struct url_list *list" "struct url *u" "const char *flags"
.Ft fetchIO *
.Fn fetchXGetFTP "struct url *u" "struct url_stat *us" "const char *flags"
.Ft fetchIO *
.Fn fetchGetFTP "struct url *u" "const char *flags"
.Ft fetchIO *
.Fn fetchPutFTP "struct url *u" "const char *flags"
.Ft int
.Fn fetchStatFTP "struct url *u" "struct url_stat *us" "const char *flags"
.Ft int
.Fn fetchListFTP "struct url_list *list" "struct url *u" "const char *flags"
.Ft void
.Fn fetchInitURLList "struct url_list *ul"
.Ft int
.Fn fetchAppendURLList "struct url_list *dst" "const struct url_list *src"
.Ft void
.Fn fetchFreeURLList "struct url_list *ul"
.Ft char *
.Fn fetchUnquotePath "struct url *u"
.Ft char *
.Fn fetchUnquoteFilename "struct url *u"
.Ft char *
.Fn fetchStringifyURL "const struct url *u"
.Ft void
.Fn fetchConnectionCacheInit "int global" "int per_host"
.Ft void
.Fn fetchConnectionCacheClose "void"
.Sh DESCRIPTION
These functions implement a high-level library for retrieving and
uploading files using Uniform Resource Locators (URLs).
.Pp
.Fn fetchParseURL
takes a URL in the form of a null-terminated string and splits it into
its components function according to the Common Internet Scheme Syntax
detailed in RFC 1738.
A regular expression which produces this syntax is:
.Bd -literal -offset indent
\*[Lt]scheme\*[Gt]:(//(\*[Lt]user\*[Gt](:\*[Lt]pwd\*[Gt])?@)?\*[Lt]host\*[Gt](:\*[Lt]port\*[Gt])?)?/(\*[Lt]document\*[Gt])?
.Ed
.Pp
If the URL does not seem to begin with a scheme name, it is assumed to be a local path.
Only absolute path names are accepted.
.Pp
Note that some components of the URL are not necessarily relevant to
all URL schemes.
For instance, the file scheme only needs the
.Aq scheme
and
.Aq document
components.
.Fn fetchParseURL
quotes any unsafe character in the URL automatically.
This is not done by
.Fn fetchMakeURL .
.Fn fetchCopyURL
copies an existing
.Vt url
structure.
.Pp
.Fn fetchMakeURL ,
.Fn fetchParseURL ,
and
.Fn fetchCopyURL
return a pointer to a
.Vt url
structure, which is defined as follows in
.In fetch.h :
.Bd -literal
#define URL_SCHEMELEN 16
#define URL_USERLEN 256
#define URL_PWDLEN 256
#define URL_HOSTLEN 255
struct url {
char scheme[URL_SCHEMELEN + 1];
char user[URL_USERLEN + 1];
char pwd[URL_PWDLEN + 1];
char host[URL_HOSTLEN + 1];
int port;
char *doc;
off_t offset;
size_t length;
time_t last_modified;
};
.Ed
.Pp
The pointer returned by
.Fn fetchMakeURL ,
.Fn fetchCopyURL ,
and
.Fn fetchParseURL
should be freed using
.Fn fetchFreeURL .
The size of
.Vt struct URL
is not part of the ABI.
.Pp
.Fn fetchXGetURL ,
.Fn fetchGetURL ,
and
.Fn fetchPutURL
constitute the recommended interface to the
.Nm fetch
library.
They examine the URL passed to them to determine the transfer
method, and call the appropriate lower-level functions to perform the
actual transfer.
.Fn fetchXGetURL
also returns the remote document's metadata in the
.Vt url_stat
structure pointed to by the
.Fa us
argument.
.Pp
The
.Fa flags
argument is a string of characters which specify transfer options.
The
meaning of the individual flags is scheme-dependent, and is detailed
in the appropriate section below.
.Pp
.Fn fetchStatURL
attempts to obtain the requested document's metadata and fill in the
structure pointed to by its second argument.
The
.Vt url_stat
structure is defined as follows in
.In fetch.h :
.Bd -literal
struct url_stat {
off_t size;
time_t atime;
time_t mtime;
};
.Ed
.Pp
If the size could not be obtained from the server, the
.Fa size
field is set to \-1.
If the modification time could not be obtained from the server, the
.Fa mtime
field is set to the epoch.
If the access time could not be obtained from the server, the
.Fa atime
field is set to the modification time.
.Pp
.Fn fetchListURL
attempts to list the contents of the directory pointed to by the URL provided.
The pattern can be a simple glob-like expression as hint.
Callers should not depend on the server to filter names.
If successful, it appends the list of entries to the
.Vt url_list
structure.
The
.Vt url_list
structure is defined as follows in
.In fetch.h :
.Bd -literal
struct url_list {
size_t length;
size_t alloc_size;
struct url *urls;
};
.Ed
.Pp
The list should be initialized by calling
.Fn fetchInitURLList
and the entries be freed by calling
.Fn fetchFreeURLList .
The function
.Fn fetchAppendURLList
can be used to append one URL lists to another.
If the
.Ql c
(cache result) flag is specified, the library is allowed to internally
cache the result.
.Pp
.Fn fetchStringifyURL
returns the URL as string.
.Fn fetchUnquotePath
returns the path name part of the URL with any quoting undone.
Query arguments and fragment identifiers are not included.
.Fn fetchUnquoteFilename
returns the last component of the path name as returned by
.Fn fetchUnquotePath .
.Fn fetchStringifyURL ,
.Fn fetchUnquotePath ,
and
.Fn fetchUnquoteFilename
return a string that should be deallocated with
.Fn free
after use.
.Pp
.Fn fetchConnectionCacheInit
enables the connection cache.
The first argument specifies the global limit on cached connections.
The second argument specifies the host limit.
Entries are considered to specify the same host, if the host name
from the URL is identical, indepent of the address or address family.
.Fn fetchConnectionCacheClose
flushed the connection cache and closes all cached connections.
.Pp
.Fn fetchXGet ,
.Fn fetchGet ,
.Fn fetchPut ,
and
.Fn fetchStat
are similar to
.Fn fetchXGetURL ,
.Fn fetchGetURL ,
.Fn fetchPutURL ,
and
.Fn fetchStatURL ,
except that they expect a pre-parsed URL in the form of a pointer to
a
.Vt struct url
rather than a string.
.Pp
All of the
.Fn fetchXGetXXX ,
.Fn fetchGetXXX ,
and
.Fn fetchPutXXX
functions return a pointer to a stream which can be used to read or
write data from or to the requested document, respectively.
Note that
although the implementation details of the individual access methods
vary, it can generally be assumed that a stream returned by one of the
.Fn fetchXGetXXX
or
.Fn fetchGetXXX
functions is read-only, and that a stream returned by one of the
.Fn fetchPutXXX
functions is write-only.
.Sh PROTOCOL INDEPENDENT FLAGS
If the
.Ql i
(if-modified-since) flag is specified, the library will try to fetch
the content only if it is newer than
.Va last_modified .
For HTTP an
.Li If-Modified-Since
HTTP header is sent.
For FTP a
.Li MTDM
command is sent first and compared locally.
For FILE the source file is compared.
.Sh FILE SCHEME
.Fn fetchXGetFile ,
.Fn fetchGetFile ,
and
.Fn fetchPutFile
provide access to documents which are files in a locally mounted file
system.
Only the
.Aq document
component of the URL is used.
.Pp
.Fn fetchXGetFile
and
.Fn fetchGetFile
do not accept any flags.
.Pp
.Fn fetchPutFile
accepts the
.Ql a
(append to file) flag.
If that flag is specified, the data written to
the stream returned by
.Fn fetchPutFile
will be appended to the previous contents of the file, instead of
replacing them.
.Sh FTP SCHEME
.Fn fetchXGetFTP ,
.Fn fetchGetFTP ,
and
.Fn fetchPutFTP
implement the FTP protocol as described in RFC 959.
.Pp
By default
.Nm libfetch
will attempt to use passive mode first and only fallback to active mode
if the server reports a syntax error.
If the
.Ql a
(active) flag is specified, a passive connection is not tried and active mode
is used directly.
.Pp
If the
.Ql l
(low) flag is specified, data sockets will be allocated in the low (or
default) port range instead of the high port range (see
.Xr ip 4 ) .
.Pp
If the
.Ql d
(direct) flag is specified,
.Fn fetchXGetFTP ,
.Fn fetchGetFTP ,
and
.Fn fetchPutFTP
will use a direct connection even if a proxy server is defined.
.Pp
If no user name or password is given, the
.Nm fetch
library will attempt an anonymous login, with user name "anonymous"
and password "anonymous@\*[Lt]hostname\*[Gt]".
.Sh HTTP SCHEME
The
.Fn fetchXGetHTTP ,
.Fn fetchGetHTTP ,
and
.Fn fetchPutHTTP
functions implement the HTTP/1.1 protocol.
With a little luck, there is
even a chance that they comply with RFC 2616 and RFC 2617.
.Pp
If the
.Ql d
(direct) flag is specified,
.Fn fetchXGetHTTP ,
.Fn fetchGetHTTP ,
and
.Fn fetchPutHTTP
will use a direct connection even if a proxy server is defined.
.Pp
Since there seems to be no good way of implementing the HTTP PUT
method in a manner consistent with the rest of the
.Nm fetch
library,
.Fn fetchPutHTTP
is currently unimplemented.
.Sh AUTHENTICATION
Apart from setting the appropriate environment variables and
specifying the user name and password in the URL or the
.Vt struct url ,
the calling program has the option of defining an authentication
function with the following prototype:
.Pp
.Ft int
.Fn myAuthMethod "struct url *u"
.Pp
The callback function should fill in the
.Fa user
and
.Fa pwd
fields in the provided
.Vt struct url
and return 0 on success, or any other value to indicate failure.
.Pp
To register the authentication callback, simply set
.Va fetchAuthMethod
to point at it.
The callback will be used whenever a site requires authentication and
the appropriate environment variables are not set.
.Pp
This interface is experimental and may be subject to change.
.Sh RETURN VALUES
.Fn fetchParseURL
returns a pointer to a
.Vt struct url
containing the individual components of the URL.
If it is
unable to allocate memory, or the URL is syntactically incorrect,
.Fn fetchParseURL
returns a
.Dv NULL
pointer.
.Pp
The
.Fn fetchStat
functions return 0 on success and \-1 on failure.
.Pp
All other functions return a stream pointer which may be used to
access the requested document, or
.Dv NULL
if an error occurred.
.Pp
The following error codes are defined in
.In fetch.h :
.Bl -tag -width 18n
.It Bq Er FETCH_ABORT
Operation aborted
.It Bq Er FETCH_AUTH
Authentication failed
.It Bq Er FETCH_DOWN
Service unavailable
.It Bq Er FETCH_EXISTS
File exists
.It Bq Er FETCH_FULL
File system full
.It Bq Er FETCH_INFO
Informational response
.It Bq Er FETCH_MEMORY
Insufficient memory
.It Bq Er FETCH_MOVED
File has moved
.It Bq Er FETCH_NETWORK
Network error
.It Bq Er FETCH_OK
No error
.It Bq Er FETCH_PROTO
Protocol error
.It Bq Er FETCH_RESOLV
Resolver error
.It Bq Er FETCH_SERVER
Server error
.It Bq Er FETCH_TEMP
Temporary error
.It Bq Er FETCH_TIMEOUT
Operation timed out
.It Bq Er FETCH_UNAVAIL
File is not available
.It Bq Er FETCH_UNKNOWN
Unknown error
.It Bq Er FETCH_URL
Invalid URL
.El
.Pp
The accompanying error message includes a protocol-specific error code
and message, e.g.\& "File is not available (404 Not Found)"
.Sh ENVIRONMENT
.Bl -tag -width ".Ev FETCH_BIND_ADDRESS"
.It Ev FETCH_BIND_ADDRESS
Specifies a host name or IP address to which sockets used for outgoing
connections will be bound.
.It Ev FTP_LOGIN
Default FTP login if none was provided in the URL.
.It Ev FTP_PASSIVE_MODE
If set to anything but
.Ql no ,
forces the FTP code to use passive mode.
.It Ev FTP_PASSWORD
Default FTP password if the remote server requests one and none was
provided in the URL.
.It Ev FTP_PROXY
URL of the proxy to use for FTP requests.
The document part is ignored.
FTP and HTTP proxies are supported; if no scheme is specified, FTP is
assumed.
If the proxy is an FTP proxy,
.Nm libfetch
will send
.Ql user@host
as user name to the proxy, where
.Ql user
is the real user name, and
.Ql host
is the name of the FTP server.
.Pp
If this variable is set to an empty string, no proxy will be used for
FTP requests, even if the
.Ev HTTP_PROXY
variable is set.
.It Ev ftp_proxy
Same as
.Ev FTP_PROXY ,
for compatibility.
.It Ev HTTP_AUTH
Specifies HTTP authorization parameters as a colon-separated list of
items.
The first and second item are the authorization scheme and realm
respectively; further items are scheme-dependent.
Currently, only basic authorization is supported.
.Pp
Basic authorization requires two parameters: the user name and
password, in that order.
.Pp
This variable is only used if the server requires authorization and
no user name or password was specified in the URL.
.It Ev HTTP_PROXY
URL of the proxy to use for HTTP requests.
The document part is ignored.
Only HTTP proxies are supported for HTTP requests.
If no port number is specified, the default is 3128.
.Pp
Note that this proxy will also be used for FTP documents, unless the
.Ev FTP_PROXY
variable is set.
.It Ev http_proxy
Same as
.Ev HTTP_PROXY ,
for compatibility.
.It Ev HTTP_PROXY_AUTH
Specifies authorization parameters for the HTTP proxy in the same
format as the
.Ev HTTP_AUTH
variable.
.Pp
This variable is used if and only if connected to an HTTP proxy, and
is ignored if a user and/or a password were specified in the proxy
URL.
.It Ev HTTP_REFERER
Specifies the referrer URL to use for HTTP requests.
If set to
.Dq auto ,
the document URL will be used as referrer URL.
.It Ev HTTP_USER_AGENT
Specifies the User-Agent string to use for HTTP requests.
This can be useful when working with HTTP origin or proxy servers that
differentiate between user agents.
.It Ev NETRC
Specifies a file to use instead of
.Pa ~/.netrc
to look up login names and passwords for FTP sites.
See
.Xr ftp 1
for a description of the file format.
This feature is experimental.
.It Ev NO_PROXY
Either a single asterisk, which disables the use of proxies
altogether, or a comma- or whitespace-separated list of hosts for
which proxies should not be used.
.It Ev no_proxy
Same as
.Ev NO_PROXY ,
for compatibility.
.El
.Sh EXAMPLES
To access a proxy server on
.Pa proxy.example.com
port 8080, set the
.Ev HTTP_PROXY
environment variable in a manner similar to this:
.Pp
.Dl HTTP_PROXY=http://proxy.example.com:8080
.Pp
If the proxy server requires authentication, there are
two options available for passing the authentication data.
The first method is by using the proxy URL:
.Pp
.Dl HTTP_PROXY=http://\*[Lt]user\*[Gt]:\*[Lt]pwd\*[Gt]@proxy.example.com:8080
.Pp
The second method is by using the
.Ev HTTP_PROXY_AUTH
environment variable:
.Bd -literal -offset indent
HTTP_PROXY=http://proxy.example.com:8080
HTTP_PROXY_AUTH=basic:*:\*[Lt]user\*[Gt]:\*[Lt]pwd\*[Gt]
.Ed
.Pp
To disable the use of a proxy for an HTTP server running on the local
host, define
.Ev NO_PROXY
as follows:
.Bd -literal -offset indent
NO_PROXY=localhost,127.0.0.1
.Ed
.Sh SEE ALSO
.\" .Xr fetch 1 ,
.\" .Xr ftpio 3 ,
.Xr ftp 1 ,
.Xr ip 4
.Rs
.%A J. Postel
.%A J. K. Reynolds
.%D October 1985
.%B File Transfer Protocol
.%O RFC 959
.Re
.Rs
.%A P. Deutsch
.%A A. Emtage
.%A A. Marine
.%D May 1994
.%T How to Use Anonymous FTP
.%O RFC 1635
.Re
.Rs
.%A T. Berners-Lee
.%A L. Masinter
.%A M. McCahill
.%D December 1994
.%T Uniform Resource Locators (URL)
.%O RFC 1738
.Re
.Rs
.%A R. Fielding
.%A J. Gettys
.%A J. Mogul
.%A H. Frystyk
.%A L. Masinter
.%A P. Leach
.%A T. Berners-Lee
.%D January 1999
.%B Hypertext Transfer Protocol -- HTTP/1.1
.%O RFC 2616
.Re
.Rs
.%A J. Franks
.%A P. Hallam-Baker
.%A J. Hostetler
.%A S. Lawrence
.%A P. Leach
.%A A. Luotonen
.%A L. Stewart
.%D June 1999
.%B HTTP Authentication: Basic and Digest Access Authentication
.%O RFC 2617
.Re
.Sh HISTORY
The
.Nm fetch
library first appeared in
.Fx 3.0 .
.Sh AUTHORS
.An -nosplit
The
.Nm fetch
library was mostly written by
.An Dag-Erling Sm\(/orgrav Aq des@FreeBSD.org
with numerous suggestions from
.An Jordan K. Hubbard Aq jkh@FreeBSD.org ,
.An Eugene Skepner Aq eu@qub.com
and other
.Fx
developers.
It replaces the older
.Nm ftpio
library written by
.An Poul-Henning Kamp Aq phk@FreeBSD.org
and
.An Jordan K. Hubbard Aq jkh@FreeBSD.org .
.Pp
This manual page was written by
.An Dag-Erling Sm\(/orgrav Aq des@FreeBSD.org .
.Sh BUGS
Some parts of the library are not yet implemented.
The most notable
examples of this are
.Fn fetchPutHTTP
and FTP proxy support.
.Pp
There is no way to select a proxy at run-time other than setting the
.Ev HTTP_PROXY
or
.Ev FTP_PROXY
environment variables as appropriate.
.Pp
.Nm libfetch
does not understand or obey 305 (Use Proxy) replies.
.Pp
Error numbers are unique only within a certain context; the error
codes used for FTP and HTTP overlap, as do those used for resolver and
system errors.
For instance, error code 202 means "Command not
implemented, superfluous at this site" in an FTP context and
"Accepted" in an HTTP context.
.Pp
.Fn fetchStatFTP
does not check that the result of an MDTM command is a valid date.
.Pp
The man page is incomplete, poorly written and produces badly
formatted text.
.Pp
The error reporting mechanism is unsatisfactory.
.Pp
Some parts of the code are not fully reentrant.

120
man/man3/fnmatch.3
View file

@ -1,120 +0,0 @@
.\" Copyright (c) 1989, 1991, 1993
.\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
.\"
.\" This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
.\" Guido van Rossum.
.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
.\" are met:
.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
.\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
.\" without specific prior written permission.
.\"
.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
.\"
.\" @(#)fnmatch.3 8.3 (Berkeley) 4/28/95
.\" $FreeBSD: src/lib/libc/gen/fnmatch.3,v 1.19.6.1 2008/11/25 02:59:29 kensmith Exp $
.\"
.TH FNMATCH 3 "July 18, 2004"
.AT 3
.SH NAME
fnmatch \- test whether a filename or pathname matches a shell-style pattern
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <fnmatch.h>
int fnmatch(const char *\fIpattern\fP, const char *\fIstring\fP, int \fIflags\fP);
.ft R
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
The
.B fnmatch
function matches patterns according to the rules used by the shell.
It checks the string specified by the
.IR string
argument to see if it matches the pattern specified by the
.IR pattern
argument.
.PP
The
.IR flags
argument modifies the interpretation of
.IR pattern
and
.IR string .
The value of
.IR flags
is the bitwise inclusive OR of any of the following
constants, which are defined in the include file fnmatch.h.
.TP 15
FNM_NOESCAPE
Normally, every occurrence of a backslash followed by a character in
.IR pattern
is replaced by that character.
This is done to negate any special meaning for the character.
If the FNM_NOESCAPE
flag is set, a backslash character is treated as an ordinary character.
.TP 15
FNM_PATHNAME
Slash characters in
.IR string
must be explicitly matched by slashes in
.IR pattern .
If this flag is not set, then slashes are treated as regular characters.
.TP 15
FNM_PERIOD
Leading periods in
.IR string
must be explicitly matched by periods in
.IR pattern .
If this flag is not set, then leading periods are treated as regular
characters.
The definition of leading is related to the specification of FNM_PATHNAME.
A period is always leading if it is the first character in
.IR string .
Additionally, if FNM_PATHNAME is set, a period is leading
if it immediately follows a slash.
.TP 15
FNM_LEADING_DIR
Ignore /* rest after successful
.IR pattern
matching.
.TP 15
FNM_CASEFOLD
Ignore case distinctions in both the
.IR pattern
and the
.IR string .
.SH RETURN VALUES
The
.B fnmatch
function returns zero if
.IR string
matches the pattern specified by
.IR pattern ,
otherwise, it returns the value FNM_NOMATCH.
.SH SEE ALSO
.BR sh (1),
.BR regex (3),
.SH HISTORY
The
.B fnmatch
function first appeared in 4.4BSD.
.SH BUGS
The pattern * matches the empty string, even if FNM_PATHNAME is specified.

99
man/man3/fopen.3
View file

@ -1,99 +0,0 @@
.\" Copyright (c) 1980 Regents of the University of California.
.\" All rights reserved. The Berkeley software License Agreement
.\" specifies the terms and conditions for redistribution.
.\"
.\" @(#)fopen.3s 6.3 (Berkeley) 5/27/86
.\"
.TH FOPEN 3 "May 27, 1986"
.UC 4
.SH NAME
fopen, freopen, fdopen \- open a stream
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <stdio.h>
FILE *fopen(const char *\fIfilename\fP, const char *\fItype\fP)
FILE *freopen(const char *\fIfilename\fP, const char *\fItype\fP, FILE *\fIstream\fP)
FILE *fdopen(int \fIfildes\fP, const char *\fItype\fP)
.ft R
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
.B Fopen
opens the file named by
.I filename
and associates a stream with it.
.B Fopen
returns a pointer to be used to identify the stream in subsequent operations.
.PP
.I Type
is a character string having one of the following values:
.TP 5
"r"
open for reading
.ns
.TP 5
"w"
create for writing
.ns
.TP 5
"a"
append: open for writing at end of file, or create for writing
.PP
In addition, each
.I type
may be followed by a "+" to have the file opened for reading and writing.
"r+" positions the stream at the beginning of the file, "w+" creates
or truncates it, and "a+" positions it at the end. Both reads and writes
may be used on read/write streams, with the limitation that an
.BR fseek ,
.BR rewind ,
or reading an end-of-file must be used between a read and a write or vice-versa.
.PP
.B Freopen
substitutes the named file in place of the open
.IR stream .
It returns the original value of
.IR stream .
The original stream is closed.
.PP
.B Freopen
is typically used to attach the preopened constant names,
.B stdin, stdout, stderr,
to specified files.
.PP
.B Fdopen
associates a stream with a file descriptor obtained from
.BR open ,
.BR dup ,
.BR creat ,
or
.BR pipe (2).
The
.I type
of the stream must agree with the mode of the open file.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR open (2),
.BR fclose (3).
.SH DIAGNOSTICS
.B Fopen
and
.B freopen
return the pointer
.SM
.B NULL
if
.I filename
cannot be accessed,
if too many files are already open,
or if other resources needed cannot be allocated.
.SH BUGS
.B Fdopen
is not portable to systems other than UNIX.
.PP
The read/write
.I types
do not exist on all systems. Those systems without
read/write modes will probably treat the
.I type
as if the "+" was not present. These are unreliable in any event.

25
man/man3/fpclassify.3
View file

@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
.TH FPCLASSIFY 3 "December 18, 2009"
.UC 4
.SH NAME
fpclassify, isfinite, isinf, isnan, isnormal, signbit \- classify floating point numbers
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <math.h>
int fpclassify(double \fIx\fP):
int isfinite(double \fIx\fP);
int isinf(double \fIx\fP);
int isnan(double \fIx\fP);
int isnormal(double \fIx\fP);
int signbit(double \fIx\fP);
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
These functions provide information about the specified floating point number
\fIx\fP. fpclassify returns one of the values FP_INFINITE, FP_NAN, FP_NORMAL,
FP_SUBNORMAL and FP_ZERO depending on the type of number provided. The isinf,
isinf, isnan and isnormal test for specific number classes, returning a
non-zero value is and only if the specified number belongs to the class
specified by the function name. The signbit function returns a non-zero value
if and only if the sign bit is set, which for non-NaN values (including zero)
means that the number is negative.

66
man/man3/fread.3
View file

@ -1,66 +0,0 @@
.\" Copyright (c) 1980 Regents of the University of California.
.\" All rights reserved. The Berkeley software License Agreement
.\" specifies the terms and conditions for redistribution.
.\"
.\" @(#)fread.3s 6.1 (Berkeley) 5/15/85
.\"
.TH FREAD 3 "May 15, 1985"
.UC 4
.SH NAME
fread, fwrite \- buffered binary input/output
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <stdio.h>
size_t fread(void *\fIptr\fP, size_t \fIitemsize\fP, size_t \fInitems\fP, FILE *\fIstream\fP)
size_t fwrite(void *\fIptr\fP, size_t \fIitemsize\fP, size_t \fInitems\fP, FILE *\fIstream\fP)
.SH DESCRIPTION
.B Fread
reads, into a block beginning at
.IR ptr ,
.I nitems
of data of the type of
.I *ptr
from the named input
.IR stream .
It returns the number of items actually read.
.PP
If
.I stream
is
.B stdin
and the standard output is line buffered, then any partial output line
will be flushed before any call to
.BR read (2)
to satisfy the
.BR fread .
.PP
.B Fwrite
appends at most
.I nitems
of data of the type of
.I *ptr
beginning at
.I ptr
to the named output
.IR stream .
It returns the number of items actually written.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR read (2),
.BR write (2),
.BR fopen (3),
.BR getc (3),
.BR putc (3),
.BR gets (3),
.BR puts (3),
.BR printf (3),
.BR scanf (3).
.SH DIAGNOSTICS
.B Fread
and
.B fwrite
return
0
upon end of file or error.

65
man/man3/fseek.3
View file

@ -1,65 +0,0 @@
.\" @(#)fseek.3s 6.3 (Berkeley) 2/24/86
.\"
.TH FSEEK 3 "February 24, 1986"
.AT 3
.SH NAME
fseek, fseeko, ftell, ftello, rewind \- reposition a stream
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <stdio.h>
int fseek(FILE *\fIstream\fP, long \fIoffset\fP, int \fIptrname\fP)
int fseeko(FILE *\fIstream\fP, off_t \fIoffset\fP, int \fIptrname\fP)
long ftell(FILE *\fIstream\fP)
off_t ftello(FILE *\fIstream\fP)
void rewind(FILE *\fIstream\fP)
.ft R
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
.B Fseek
and
.B fseeko
set the position of the next input or output
operation on the
.IR stream .
The new position is at the signed distance
.I offset
bytes
from the beginning, the current position, or the end of the file,
according as
.I ptrname
has the value 0, 1, or 2.
.PP
.B Fseek
and
.B fseeko
undo any effects of
.BR ungetc (3).
.PP
.B Ftell
and
.B ftello
return the current value of the offset relative to the beginning
of the file associated with the named
.IR stream .
It is measured in bytes on UNIX;
on some other systems it is a magic cookie,
and the only foolproof way to obtain an
.I offset
for
.BR fseek
and
.BR fseeko .
.PP
.BR Rewind "(\fIstream\fR)"
is equivalent to
.BR fseek "(\fIstream\fR, 0L, 0)."
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR lseek (2),
.BR fopen (3).
.SH DIAGNOSTICS
.B Fseek
and
.B fseeko
return \-1 for improper seeks, otherwise zero.

165
man/man3/g_h_b_n.3
View file

@ -1,165 +0,0 @@
.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1987 The Regents of the University of California.
.\" All rights reserved.
.\"
.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided
.\" that: (1) source distributions retain this entire copyright notice and
.\" comment, and (2) distributions including binaries display the following
.\" acknowledgement: ``This product includes software developed by the
.\" University of California, Berkeley and its contributors'' in the
.\" documentation or other materials provided with the distribution and in
.\" all advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software.
.\" Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may
.\" be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
.\" specific prior written permission.
.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
.\" WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
.\" MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
.\"
.\" @(#)gethostbyname.3 6.12 (Berkeley) 6/23/90
.\"
.TH GETHOSTBYNAME 3 "June 23, 1990"
.UC 5
.SH NAME
g_h_b_n, gethostbyname, gethostbyaddr, gethostent, sethostent, endhostent, herror \- get network host entry
.SH SYNOPSIS
.B "#include <net/gen/netdb.h>
.PP
.B "extern int h_errno;
.PP
.B "struct hostent *gethostbyname(name)
.br
.B "char *name;
.PP
.B "struct hostent *gethostbyaddr(addr, len, type)
.br
.B "char *addr; int len, type;
.PP
.B "struct hostent *gethostent()
.PP
.B "sethostent(stayopen)
.br
.B "int stayopen;
.PP
.B "endhostent()
.PP
.B "herror(string)
.br
.B "char *string;
.PP
.SH DESCRIPTION
.I Gethostbyname
and
.I gethostbyaddr
each return a pointer to an object with the
following structure describing an internet host
referenced by name or by address, respectively.
This structure contains the information obtained from the name server.
.PP
.nf
struct hostent {
char *h_name; /* official name of host */
char **h_aliases; /* alias list */
int h_addrtype; /* host address type */
int h_length; /* length of address */
char **h_addr_list; /* list of addresses from name server */
};
#define h_addr h_addr_list[0] /* address, for backward compatibility */
.ft R
.ad
.fi
.PP
The members of this structure are:
.TP \w'h_addr_list'u+2n
h_name
Official name of the host.
.TP \w'h_addr_list'u+2n
h_aliases
A zero terminated array of alternate names for the host.
.TP \w'h_addr_list'u+2n
h_addrtype
The type of address being returned; currently always AF_INET.
.TP \w'h_addr_list'u+2n
h_length
The length, in bytes, of the address.
.TP \w'h_addr_list'u+2n
h_addr_list
A zero terminated array of network addresses for the host.
Host addresses are returned in network byte order.
.TP \w'h_addr_list'u+2n
h_addr
The first address in h_addr_list; this is for backward compatiblity.
.PP
When using the nameserver,
.I gethostbyname
will search for the named host in the current domain and its parents
unless the name ends in a dot.
If the name contains no dot, and if the environment variable ``HOSTALAIASES''
contains the name of an alias file, the alias file will first be searched
for an alias matching the input name.
See
.IR hostname (7)
for the domain search procedure and the alias file format.
.PP
.I Sethostent
may be used to request the use of a connected TCP socket for queries.
If the
.I stayopen
flag is non-zero,
this sets the option to send all queries to the name server using TCP
and to retain the connection after each call to
.I gethostbyname
or
.IR gethostbyaddr .
Otherwise, queries are performed using UDP datagrams.
.PP
.I Endhostent
closes the TCP connection.
.SH DIAGNOSTICS
.PP
Error return status from
.I gethostbyname
and
.I gethostbyaddr
is indicated by return of a null pointer.
The external integer
.IR h_errno
may then be checked to see whether this is a temporary failure
or an invalid or unknown host.
The routine
.I herror
can be used to print an error message describing the failure.
If its argument
.I string
is non-NULL, it is printed, followed by a colon and a space.
The error message is printed with a trailing newline.
.PP
.IR h_errno
can have the following values:
.RS
.IP HOST_NOT_FOUND \w'HOST_NOT_FOUND'u+2n
No such host is known.
.IP TRY_AGAIN \w'HOST_NOT_FOUND'u+2n
This is usually a temporary error
and means that the local server did not receive
a response from an authoritative server.
A retry at some later time may succeed.
.IP NO_RECOVERY \w'HOST_NOT_FOUND'u+2n
Some unexpected server failure was encountered.
This is a non-recoverable error.
.IP NO_DATA \w'HOST_NOT_FOUND'u+2n
The requested name is valid but does not have an IP address;
this is not a temporary error.
This means that the name is known to the name server but there is no address
associated with this name.
Another type of request to the name server using this domain name
will result in an answer;
for example, a mail-forwarder may be registered for this domain.
.RE
.SH "SEE ALSO"
resolver(3), hostname(7), nonamed(8), named(8)
.SH BUGS
All information
is contained in a static area
so it must be copied if it is
to be saved. Only the Internet
address format is currently understood.

66
man/man3/getaddrinfo.3
View file

@ -1,66 +0,0 @@
.TH GETADDRINFO 3 "January 19, 2010"
.UC 4
.SH NAME
getaddrinfo, freeaddrinfo, gai_strerror, getnameinfo \- address information
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <netdb.h>
void freeaddrinfo(struct addrinfo *\fIai\fP);
int getaddrinfo(const char *\fInodename\fP,
const char *\fIservname\fP,
const struct addrinfo *\fIhints\fP,
struct addrinfo **\fIres\fP);
int getnameinfo(const struct sockaddr *\fIsa\fP, socklen_t \fIsalen\fP,
char *\fInode\fP, socklen_t \fInodelen\fP, char *\fIservice\fP,
socklen_t \fIservicelen\fP, int \fIflags\fP);
const char *gai_strerror(int \fIecode\fP);
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
These functions provide to convert between host and service names on the one
hand and network addresses and ports on the other.
.PP
getaddrinfo converts the hostname specified in \fInodename\fP and/or the service
name in \fIservname\fP into a socket address that can be used to connect to that
service or listen for incoming connections. One of the parameters may be NULL.
If \fInodename\fP is NULL, an address for the local host is provided. If
\fIservname\fP is NULL, the network port is not filled in (and therefore set to
zero). Buffers are allocated to store the results and a pointer to the first
element of a linked list of addresses is stored in \fIai\fP. These buffers must
be freed by calling freeaddrinfo on the pointer returned in \fIai\fP.
.PP
getnameinfo converts the specified socket address into a hostname and/or service
name. These are stored in the buffers pointed to by \fInode\fP and \fIservice\fP
resepectively. \fInodelen\fP and \fIservicelen\fP specify the sizes of these
buffers. If the result string including null terminator does not fit in the
buffer, the function fails and EAI_OVERFLOW is returned.
.PP
For both functions, some flags may be specified to alter their behaviour. For
getaddrinfo these flags are specified in the ai_flags field of the optional
\fIhints\fP parameter. AI_PASSIVE indicates that an address suitable for the
bind function should be returned, otherwise an address suitable for connect is
provided. AI_CANONNAME requests that the canonical name of the host be retrieved
and stored in the ai_canonname field of the result. AI_NUMERICHOST and
AI_NUMERICSERV indicate respectively that \fInodename\fP is an IP address and
\fIservname\fP is a port number, avoiding a lookup. Search can be limited to a
specific socket type by setting \fIhints\fP\->ai_socktype to SOCK_STREAM or
SOCK_DGRAM. \fIhints\fP\->ai_family can be set to AF_UNSPEC or AF_INET but this
doesn't make a difference as MINIX supports only IPv4. Unused fields of
\fIhints\fP must be set to zero.
.PP
Flags for getnameinfo are specified in the \fIflags\fP parameter. NI_NUMERICHOST
and NI_NUMERICSERV respectively cause \fInode\fP to be set to an IP address
and \fIservice\fP to be set to a port number. NI_NAMEREQD causes the function
to fail with EAI_NONAME if a name is not found for the host (otherwise the IP
address is returned). NI_DGRAM indicates that a datagram service is specified,
the default being a stream service.
.SH "RETURN VALUE
If the functions succeed, they return 0. If they fail, one of the EAI_* values
defined in netdb.h is returned. This value can be converted into a string using
gai_strerror. The most important ones are EAI_NONAME (host name not found),
EAI_SERVICE (service name not found) and EAI_OVERFLOW (buffer too small, only
for getnameinfo).
.SH "KNOWN ISSUES
Since MINIX does not support IPv6, the related flags are not supported.
The NI_NOFQDN flag is also not (yet) supported.

79
man/man3/getc.3
View file

@ -1,79 +0,0 @@
.\" @(#)getc.3s 6.2 (Berkeley) 5/14/86
.\"
.TH GETC 3 "May 14, 1986"
.AT 3
.SH NAME
getc, getchar, fgetc, getw \- get character or word from stream
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <stdio.h>
int getc(FILE *\fIstream\fP)
int getchar(void)
int fgetc(FILE *\fIstream\fP)
int getw(FILE *\fIstream\fP)
.ft R
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
.B Getc
returns the next character from the named input
.IR stream .
.PP
.BR Getchar ()
is identical to
.BR getc ( stdin ).
.PP
.B Fgetc
behaves like
.BR getc ,
but is a genuine function, not a macro;
it may be used to save object text.
.PP
.B Getw
returns the next
.B int
from the named input
.IR stream .
It returns the constant
.SM
.B EOF
upon end of file or error, but since that is a good
integer value,
.B feof
and
.BR ferror (3)
should be used to check the success of
.BR getw .
.B Getw
assumes no special alignment in the file.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR clearerr (3),
.BR fopen (3),
.BR putc (3),
.BR gets (3),
.BR scanf (3),
.BR fread (3),
.BR ungetc (3).
.SH DIAGNOSTICS
These functions return the integer constant
.SM
.B EOF
at end of file, upon read error,
or if an attempt is made to read a file not opened by
.BR fopen .
The end-of-file condition is remembered,
even on a terminal,
and all subsequent attempts to read will return
.B EOF
until the condition is cleared with
.BR clearerr (3).
.SH BUGS
Because it is implemented as a macro,
.B getc
treats a
.I stream
argument with side effects incorrectly.
In particular,
`getc(*f++);'
doesn't work sensibly.

136
man/man3/getcontext.3
View file

@ -1,136 +0,0 @@
.Dd Mar 2, 2010
.Dt GETCONTEXT 3
.Os
.Sh NAME
.Nm getcontext ,
.Nm setcontext
.Nd get and set current user context
.Sh LIBRARY
.Lb libc
.Sh SYNOPSIS
.In ucontext.h
.Ft int
.Fn getcontext "ucontext_t *ucp"
.Ft int
.Fn setcontext "const ucontext_t *ucp"
.Sh DESCRIPTION
The
.Xr makecontext 3
,
.Xr swapcontext 3
,
.Xr getcontext 3
, and
.Xr setcontext 3
together form a set of functions that allow user-level context switching between multiple threads of control within a process.
.Pp
The
.Vt ucontext_t
type is a structure that has at least the following members:
.Bd -offset 4n -literal
typedef struct __ucontext {
ucontext_t *uc_link;
sigset_t uc_sigmask;
stack_t uc_stack;
mcontext_t uc_mcontext;
...
} ucontext_t;
.Ed
with
.Vt sigset_t
and
.Vt stack_t
defined in
.In signal.h .
Here
.Va uc_link
points to the context that will be resumed when the current context returns (if
.Va uc_link
is NULL, the process exits),
.Va uc_sigmask
is the set of signals blocked in this context,
.Va uc_stack
is the stack used by this context (when the context was modified by
.Xr makecontext 3 ),
and
.Va uc_mcontext
is the machine-specific representation of the saved context. The
.Vt mcontext_t
type is machine-dependent and opaque.
.Pp
MINIX 3 has an additional
.Va uc_flags
member that supports the following flags:
.Pp
.Bd -offset 4n -literal
UCF_IGNSIGM /* Current signal mask is not stored or restored */
UCF_IGNFPU /* FPU state is not stored or restored for this context */
.Ed
.Pp
Not storing and restoring the signal mask and/or FPU state speeds up context switching considerably.
.Pp
The
.Fn getcontext
function initializes the structure pointed to by
.Va ucp
to the current user context of the calling thread.
.Pp
The
.Fn setcontext
function restores the user context pointed to by
.Va ucp .
A succesful call does not return; program execution resumes at the point specified by the
.Va ucp
argument passed to
.Fn setcontext .
The
.Va ucp
argument should be created either by a prior call to
.Fn getcontext
or
.Fn makecontext .
If the
.Va ucp
argument was created with
.Fn getcontext ,
program execution continues as if the corresponding call of
.Fn getcontext
had just returned. If the
.Va ucp
argument was created with
.Fn makecontext ,
program execution continues with the function passed to
.Fn makecontext .
.Sh RETURN VALUES
When successful,
.Fn getcontext
returns 0 and
.Fn setcontext
does not return. Otherwise, both return -1 and
.Va errno
is set to indicate the error.
.Sh ERRORS
.Bl -tag -width Er
.It Bq Er EINVAL
The context is not properly initialized.
.It Bq Er EFAULT
.Va ucp
is a NULL pointer.
.El
.Sh SEE ALSO
.Xr makecontext 3 ,
.Xr swapcontext 3
.Sh STANDARDS
The
.Fn getcontext ,
and
.Fn setcontext
functions conform to
.St -xsh5
and
.St -p1003.1-2001 .
.Sh AUTHORS
Thomas Veerman

36
man/man3/getcwd.3
View file

@ -1,36 +0,0 @@
.\" Copyright (c) 1983 Regents of the University of California.
.\" All rights reserved. The Berkeley software License Agreement
.\" specifies the terms and conditions for redistribution.
.\"
.\" @(#)getwd.3 6.2 (Berkeley) 5/12/86
.\"
.TH GETCWD 3 "May 12, 1986"
.UC 5
.SH NAME
getcwd \- get current working directory pathname
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <unistd.h>
char *getcwd(char *\fIpathname\fP, size_t \fIlen\fP)
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
.B Getcwd
copies the absolute pathname of the current working directory to
.I pathname
and returns a pointer to the result.
.I Pathname
is a character array of length
.IR len .
.SH DIAGNOSTICS
.B Getcwd
returns a null pointer and sets
.B errno
if an error occurs. The error will reflect the system call errors that
may occur if the path to the current directory is searched upwards to
the root directory. The error
.B ERANGE
is returned if the result does not fit within
.I len
bytes.

16
man/man3/getdtablesize.3
View file

@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
.TH GETDTABLESIZE 3 "December 4, 2009"
.UC 4
.SH NAME
getdtablesize \- query maximum number of open files
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <unistd.h>
int getdtablesize(void);
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
getdtablesize returns the number of files that may be open at the same time
in a process.
.SH "RETURN VALUE
The number of files that may be open at the same time in a process is returned.

29
man/man3/getenv.3
View file

@ -1,29 +0,0 @@
.\" @(#)getenv.3 6.1 (Berkeley) 5/15/85
.\"
.TH GETENV 3 "May 15, 1985"
.AT 3
.SH NAME
getenv \- value for environment name
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <stdlib.h>
char *getenv(const char *\fIname\fP)
.ft R
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
.B Getenv
searches the environment list
(see
.BR environ (7))
for a string of the form
.IB name = value
and returns a pointer to the string
.I value
if such a string is present, otherwise
.B getenv
returns the null pointer.
.SH SEE ALSO
.BR environ (7),
.BR execve (2).

136
man/man3/getgrent.3
View file

@ -1,136 +0,0 @@
.TH GETGRENT 3
.SH NAME
getgrent, getgrnam, getgrgid, setgrent, endgrent, setgrfile \- group file routines
.SH SYNOPSIS
.ft B
.nf
#include <grp.h>
struct group *getgrent(void)
struct group *getgrnam(const char *\fIname\fP)
struct group *getgrgid(gid_t \fIgid\fP)
int setgrent(void)
void endgrent(void)
void setgrfile(const char *\fIfile\fP)
.fi
.ft P
.SH DESCRIPTION
These functions are used to obtain information from the group file. They
return this information in a
.B struct group
as defined by <grp.h>:
.PP
.nf
.ta +4n +6n +15n
struct group {
char *gr_name; /* login name */
char *gr_passwd; /* encrypted password */
gid_t gr_gid; /* numeric group id */
char **gr_mem; /* null-terminated list of group members */
};
.fi
.PP
.B Getgrent()
reads the group file entry by entry.
.B Getgrnam()
scans the entire group file for the group with the given
.IR name .
.B Getgrgid()
looks for the first group with the given
.IR gid .
The
.B setgrent()
and
.B endgrent()
functions are used to open and later close the group file. With
.B setgrfile()
one can specify the file to read other than the normal group file. This
only sets the name, the next
.B setgrent()
call will open the file. Do not touch the file name while it is active.
Use
.B setgrfile(NULL)
to revert back to the normal group file.
.PP
The usual way to scan the group file is (error checking omitted):
.PP
.RS
.nf
.DT
setgrent();
while ((gr = getgrent()) != NULL)
if (appropriate_test(gr)) break;
endgrent();
.fi
.RE
.PP
The
.B gr
variable contains the entry that is wanted if non-NULL. The
.B getgrnam()
and
.B getgrgid()
functions are implemented as in this example, with error checking of course.
.PP
.B Getgrent()
calls
.B setgrent()
if this has not yet been done.
.B Setgrent()
first calls
.B endgrent()
if the group file is still open. (Other implementations may simply
rewind the file.)
.SH FILES
.TP 15
.B /etc/group
The group file database.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR getgroups (2),
.BR initgroups (3),
.BR getpwent (3),
.BR passwd (5).
.SH DIAGNOSTICS
.B Setgrent()
has the same return value and error codes as the
.BR open (2)
call it uses to open the group file. The
.BI get xxx ()
functions return NULL on end of file, entry not found, or error. You can
set
.B errno
to zero before the call and check it after.
.SH NOTES
All
.BI get xxx ()
routines return a pointer to static storage that is overwritten in each call.
.PP
Only
.B getgrnam()
and
.B getgrgid()
are defined by \s-2POSIX\s+2. The
.B _MINIX_SOURCE
macro must be defined before including <grp.h> to make the other functions
visible. The
.B gr_passwd
field is also not defined by \s-2POSIX\s+2, but is always visible.
Portable code cannot reliably detect errors by setting
.B errno
to zero. Under MINIX 3 it is better to make a
.B getgrent()
scan if you need to look up several group-id's or names, but portable code
had better use several
.B getgrgid()
or
.B getgrnam()
calls. The
.B getgrent()
is usually available on other systems, but may be very expensive. See
.BR initgroups (3)
if you are after supplementary group id's.
.SH AUTHOR
Kees J. Bot (kjb@cs.vu.nl)
.\"
.\" $PchId: getgrent.3,v 1.2 1996/04/11 06:35:01 philip Exp $

36
man/man3/getloadavg.3
View file

@ -1,36 +0,0 @@
.\" @(#)getloadavg.3
.\"
.TH GETLOADAVG 3 "Nov 14, 2005"
.AT 3
.SH NAME
getloadavg \- system load average values
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <stdlib.h>
int getloadavg(double *\fIaverages\fP, int \fInelem\fP)
.ft R
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
.B Getloadavg
returns the system load average values as elements of
.IR averages
up to
a maximum of
.IR nelem
elements.
The system load average is the average number of
runnable processes over a certain period. Currently the averages are
delivered over the last 1, 5 and 15 minutes of system usage. So
currently the system maximum is 3.
.SH RETURNS
The returned value of
.B getloadavg
is zero or more if the call was successful, or a negative value if the
call was unsuccessful. If the call was successful, the number of
elements entered into
.IR averages
is returned.
.SH SEE ALSO
.BR uptime (1).

45
man/man3/getlogin.3
View file

@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
.\" @(#)getlogin.3 6.2 (Berkeley) 5/9/86
.\"
.TH GETLOGIN 3 "May 9, 1986"
.AT 3
.SH NAME
getlogin \- get login name
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <unistd.h>
char *getlogin(void)
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
.B Getlogin
returns a pointer to the login name as found in
.BR /etc/utmp .
It may be used in conjunction with
.B getpwnam
to locate the correct password file entry when the same user ID
is shared by several login names.
.PP
If
.B getlogin
is called within a process that is not attached to a
terminal, or if there is no entry in
.B /etc/utmp
for the process's terminal,
.B getlogin
returns a null pointer.
A reasonable procedure for determining the login name is to first call
.B getlogin
and if it fails, to call
.BR getpwuid ( getuid ()).
.SH FILES
/etc/utmp
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR getpwent (3),
.BR utmp (5),
.BR ttyslot (3)
.SH DIAGNOSTICS
Returns a null pointer if the name cannot be found.
.SH BUGS
The return values point to static data
whose content is overwritten by each call.

150
man/man3/getopt.3
View file

@ -1,150 +0,0 @@
.\" Copyright (c) 1985 Regents of the University of California.
.\" All rights reserved. The Berkeley software License Agreement
.\" specifies the terms and conditions for redistribution.
.\"
.\" @(#)getopt.3 6.4 (Berkeley) 5/27/86
.\"
.TH GETOPT 3 "May 27, 1986"
.UC 6
.SH NAME
getopt \- get option letter from argv
.SH SYNOPSIS
.ft B
int getopt(argc, argv, optstring)
.br
int argc;
.br
char **argv;
.br
char *optstring;
.sp
extern char *optarg;
.br
extern int optind;
.ft
.SH DESCRIPTION
.I Getopt
returns the next option letter in
.I argv
that matches a letter in
.IR optstring .
.I Optstring
is a string of recognized option letters;
if a letter is followed by a colon, the option is expected to have
an argument that may or may not be separated from it by white space.
.I Optarg
is set to point to the start of the option argument on return from
.IR getopt .
.PP
.I Getopt
places in
.I optind
the
.I argv
index of the next argument to be processed.
Because
.I optind
is external, it is normally initialized to zero automatically
before the first call to
.IR getopt .
.PP
When all options have been processed (i.e., up to the first
non-option argument),
.I getopt
returns
.BR EOF .
The special option
.B \-\-
may be used to delimit the end of the options;
.B EOF
will be returned, and
.B \-\-
will be skipped.
.SH DIAGNOSTICS
.I Getopt
prints an error message on
.I stderr
and returns a question mark
.RB ( ? )
when it encounters an option letter not included in
.IR optstring .
.SH EXAMPLE
The following code fragment shows how one might process the arguments
for a command that can take the mutually exclusive options
.B a
and
.BR b ,
and the options
.B f
and
.BR o ,
both of which require arguments:
.PP
.RS
.nf
main(argc, argv)
int argc;
char **argv;
{
int c;
extern int optind;
extern char *optarg;
\&.
\&.
\&.
while ((c = getopt(argc, argv, "abf:o:")) != EOF)
switch (c) {
case `a':
if (bflg)
errflg++;
else
aflg++;
break;
case `b':
if (aflg)
errflg++;
else
bproc();
break;
case `f':
ifile = optarg;
break;
case `o':
ofile = optarg;
break;
case `?':
default:
errflg++;
break;
}
if (errflg) {
fprintf(stderr, "Usage: ...");
exit(2);
}
for (; optind < argc; optind++) {
\&.
\&.
\&.
}
\&.
\&.
\&.
}
.RE
.SH HISTORY
Written by Henry Spencer, working from a Bell Labs manual page.
Modified by Keith Bostic to behave more like the System V version.
.SH BUGS
It is not obvious how
`\-'
standing alone should be treated; this version treats it as
a non-option argument, which is not always right.
.PP
Option arguments are allowed to begin with `\-';
this is reasonable but reduces the amount of error checking possible.
.PP
.I Getopt
is quite flexible but the obvious price must be paid: there is much
it could do that it doesn't, like
checking mutually exclusive options, checking type of
option arguments, etc.

310
man/man3/getopt_long.3
View file

@ -1,310 +0,0 @@
.\" $NetBSD: getopt_long.3,v 1.18 2007/07/02 17:56:17 ginsbach Exp $
.\"
.\" Copyright (c) 1988, 1991, 1993
.\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
.\"
.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
.\" are met:
.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
.\" 3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
.\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
.\" without specific prior written permission.
.\"
.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
.\"
.\" @(#)getopt.3 8.5 (Berkeley) 4/27/95
.\"
.Dd July 2, 2007
.Dt GETOPT_LONG 3
.Os
.Sh NAME
.Nm getopt_long
.Nd get long options from command line argument list
.Sh LIBRARY
.Lb libc
.Sh SYNOPSIS
.In getopt.h
.Ft int
.Fn getopt_long "int argc" "char * const *argv" "const char *optstring" "struct option *long_options" "int *index"
.Sh DESCRIPTION
The
.Fn getopt_long
function is similar to
.Xr getopt 3
but it accepts options in two forms: words and characters.
The
.Fn getopt_long
function provides a superset of the functionality of
.Xr getopt 3 .
.Fn getopt_long
can be used in two ways.
In the first way, every long option understood by the program has a
corresponding short option, and the option structure is only used to
translate from long options to short options.
When used in this fashion,
.Fn getopt_long
behaves identically to
.Xr getopt 3 .
This is a good way to add long option processing to an existing program
with the minimum of rewriting.
.Pp
In the second mechanism, a long option sets a flag in the
.Fa option
structure passed, or will store a pointer to the command line argument
in the
.Fa option
structure passed to it for options that take arguments.
Additionally, the long option's argument may be specified as a single
argument with an equal sign, e.g.
.Bd -literal
myprogram --myoption=somevalue
.Ed
.Pp
When a long option is processed the call to
.Fn getopt_long
will return 0.
For this reason, long option processing without
shortcuts is not backwards compatible with
.Xr getopt 3 .
.Pp
It is possible to combine these methods, providing for long options
processing with short option equivalents for some options.
Less frequently used options would be processed as long options only.
.Pp
Abbreviated long option names are accepted when
.Fn getopt_long
processes long options if the abbreviation is unique.
An exact match is always preferred for a defined long option.
.Pp
The
.Fn getopt_long
call requires a structure to be initialized describing the long options.
The structure is:
.Bd -literal
struct option {
char *name;
int has_arg;
int *flag;
int val;
};
.Ed
.Pp
The
.Fa name
field should contain the option name without the leading double dash.
.Pp
The
.Fa has_arg
field should be one of:
.Bl -tag -width "optional_argument"
.It Li no_argument
no argument to the option is expect.
.It Li required_argument
an argument to the option is required.
.It Li optional_argument
an argument to the option may be presented.
.El
.Pp
If
.Fa flag
is not
.Dv NULL ,
then the integer pointed to by it will be set to the value in the
.Fa val
field.
If the
.Fa flag
field is
.Dv NULL ,
then the
.Fa val
field will be returned.
Setting
.Fa flag
to
.Dv NULL
and setting
.Fa val
to the corresponding short option will make this function act just
like
.Xr getopt 3 .
.Pp
If the
.Fa index
field is not
.Dv NULL ,
the integer it points to will be set to the index of the long option
in the
.Fa long_options
array.
.Pp
The last element of the
.Fa long_options
array has to be filled with zeroes (see
.Sx EXAMPLES
section).
.Sh EXAMPLES
.Bd -literal -compact
extern char *optarg;
extern int optind;
int bflag, ch, fd;
int daggerset;
/* options descriptor */
static struct option longopts[] = {
{ "buffy", no_argument, 0, 'b' },
{ "fluoride", required_argument, 0, 'f' },
{ "daggerset", no_argument, \*[Am]daggerset, 1 },
{ NULL, 0, NULL, 0 }
};
bflag = 0;
while ((ch = getopt_long(argc, argv, "bf:", longopts, NULL)) != -1)
switch (ch) {
case 'b':
bflag = 1;
break;
case 'f':
if ((fd = open(optarg, O_RDONLY, 0)) \*[Lt] 0) {
(void)fprintf(stderr,
"myname: %s: %s\en", optarg, strerror(errno));
exit(1);
}
break;
case 0:
if(daggerset) {
fprintf(stderr,"Buffy will use her dagger to "
"apply fluoride to dracula's teeth\en");
}
break;
case '?':
default:
usage();
}
argc -= optind;
argv += optind;
.Ed
.Sh IMPLEMENTATION DIFFERENCES
This section describes differences to the GNU implementation
found in glibc-2.1.3:
.Bl -tag -width "xxx"
.It Li o
handling of - as first char of option string in presence of
environment variable POSIXLY_CORRECT:
.Bl -tag -width "NetBSD"
.It Li GNU
ignores POSIXLY_CORRECT and returns non-options as
arguments to option '\e1'.
.It Li NetBSD
honors POSIXLY_CORRECT and stops at the first non-option.
.El
.It Li o
handling of :: in options string in presence of POSIXLY_CORRECT:
.Bl -tag -width "NetBSD"
.It Li Both
GNU and NetBSD ignore POSIXLY_CORRECT here and take :: to
mean the preceding option takes an optional argument.
.El
.It Li o
return value in case of missing argument if first character
(after + or -) in option string is not ':':
.Bl -tag -width "NetBSD"
.It Li GNU
returns '?'
.It NetBSD
returns ':' (since NetBSD's getopt does).
.El
.It Li o
handling of --a in getopt:
.Bl -tag -width "NetBSD"
.It Li GNU
parses this as option '-', option 'a'.
.It Li NetBSD
parses this as '--', and returns \-1 (ignoring the a).
(Because the original getopt does.)
.El
.It Li o
setting of optopt for long options with flag !=
.Dv NULL :
.Bl -tag -width "NetBSD"
.It Li GNU
sets optopt to val.
.It Li NetBSD
sets optopt to 0 (since val would never be returned).
.El
.It Li o
handling of -W with W; in option string in getopt (not getopt_long):
.Bl -tag -width "NetBSD"
.It Li GNU
causes a segfault.
.It Li NetBSD
returns \-1, with optind pointing past the argument of -W
(as if `-W arg' were `--arg', and thus '--' had been found).
.\" How should we treat W; in the option string when called via
.\" getopt? Ignore the ';' or treat it as a ':'? Issue a warning?
.El
.It Li o
setting of optarg for long options without an argument that are
invoked via -W (W; in option string):
.Bl -tag -width "NetBSD"
.It Li GNU
sets optarg to the option name (the argument of -W).
.It Li NetBSD
sets optarg to
.Dv NULL
(the argument of the long option).
.El
.It Li o
handling of -W with an argument that is not (a prefix to) a known
long option (W; in option string):
.Bl -tag -width "NetBSD"
.It Li GNU
returns -W with optarg set to the unknown option.
.It Li NetBSD
treats this as an error (unknown option) and returns '?' with
optopt set to 0 and optarg set to
.Dv NULL
(as GNU's man page documents).
.El
.It Li o
The error messages are different.
.It Li o
NetBSD does not permute the argument vector at the same points in
the calling sequence as GNU does.
The aspects normally used by the caller
(ordering after \-1 is returned, value of optind relative
to current positions) are the same, though.
(We do fewer variable swaps.)
.El
.Sh SEE ALSO
.Xr getopt 3
.Sh HISTORY
The
.Fn getopt_long
function first appeared in GNU libiberty.
The first
.Nx
implementation appeared in 1.5.
.Sh BUGS
The implementation can completely replace
.Xr getopt 3 ,
but right now we are using separate code.
.Pp
The
.Fa argv
argument is not really const.

28
man/man3/getpass.3
View file

@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
.\" @(#)getpass.3 6.1 (Berkeley) 5/15/85
.\"
.TH GETPASS 3 "May 15, 1985"
.AT 3
.SH NAME
getpass \- read a password
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <minix/minlib.h>
char *getpass(const char *\fIprompt\fP)
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
.B Getpass
reads a password from the file
.BR /dev/tty ,
or if that cannot be opened, from the standard input,
after prompting with the null-terminated string
.I prompt
and disabling echoing.
A pointer is returned to a null-terminated string
of at most 32 characters, excluding the null.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR crypt (3).
.SH BUGS
The return value points to static data
whose content is overwritten by each call.

139
man/man3/getpwent.3
View file

@ -1,139 +0,0 @@
.TH GETPWENT 3
.SH NAME
getpwent, getpwnam, getpwuid, setpwent, endpwent, setpwfile \- password file routines
.SH SYNOPSIS
.ft B
.nf
#include <pwd.h>
struct passwd *getpwent(void)
struct passwd *getpwnam(const char *\fIname\fP)
struct passwd *getpwuid(uid_t \fIuid\fP)
int setpwent(void)
void endpwent(void)
void setpwfile(const char *\fIfile\fP)
.fi
.ft P
.SH DESCRIPTION
These functions are used to obtain information from the password file. They
return this information in a
.B struct passwd
as defined by <pwd.h>:
.PP
.nf
.ta +4n +6n +15n
struct passwd {
char *pw_name; /* login name */
char *pw_passwd; /* encrypted password */
uid_t pw_uid; /* numeric user id */
gid_t pw_gid; /* numeric group id */
char *pw_gecos; /* user full name and other info */
char *pw_dir; /* user's home directory */
char *pw_shell; /* name of the user's shell */
};
.fi
.PP
.B Getpwent()
reads the password file entry by entry.
.B Getpwnam()
scans the entire password file for the user with the given
.IR name .
.B Getpwuid()
looks for the first user with the given
.IR uid .
The
.B setpwent()
and
.B endpwent()
functions are used to open and later close the password file. With
.B setpwfile()
one can specify the file to read other than the normal password file. This
only sets the name, the next
.B setpwent()
call will open the file. Do not touch the file name while it is active.
Use
.B setpwfile(NULL)
to revert back to the normal password file.
.PP
The usual way to scan the password file is (error checking omitted):
.PP
.RS
.nf
.DT
setpwent();
while ((pw = getpwent()) != NULL)
if (appropriate_test(pw)) break;
endpwent();
.fi
.RE
.PP
The
.B pw
variable contains the entry that is wanted if non-NULL. The
.B getpwnam()
and
.B getpwuid()
functions are implemented as in this example, with error checking of course.
.PP
.B Getpwent()
calls
.B setpwent()
if this has not yet been done.
.B Setpwent()
first calls
.B endpwent()
if the password file is still open. (Other implementations may simply
rewind the file.)
.SH FILES
.TP 15
.B /etc/passwd
The password file database.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR cuserid (3),
.BR getlogin (3),
.BR getgrent (3),
.BR passwd (5).
.SH DIAGNOSTICS
.B Setpwent()
has the same return value and error codes as the
.BR open (2)
call it uses to open the password file. The
.BI get xxx ()
functions return NULL on end of file, entry not found, or error. You can
set
.B errno
to zero before the call and check it after.
.SH NOTES
All
.BI get xxx ()
routines return a pointer to static storage that is overwritten in each call.
.PP
Only
.B getpwnam()
and
.B getpwuid()
are defined by \s-2POSIX\s+2. The
.B _MINIX_SOURCE
macro must be defined before including <pwd.h> to make the other functions
visible. The
.B pw_passwd
and
.B pw_gecos
fields are also not defined by \s-2POSIX\s+2, but are always visible.
Portable code cannot reliably detect errors by setting
.B errno
to zero. Under MINIX 3 it is better to make a
.B getpwent()
scan if you need to look up several user-id's or names, but portable code
had better use several
.B getpwuid()
or
.B getpwnam()
calls. The
.B getpwent()
is usually available on other systems, but may be very expensive.
.SH AUTHOR
Kees J. Bot (kjb@cs.vu.nl)
.\"
.\" $PchId: getpwent.3,v 1.2 1996/04/11 06:37:43 philip Exp $

23
man/man3/getrlimit.3
View file

@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
.TH GETRLIMIT 3 "December 4, 2009"
.UC 4
.SH NAME
getrlimit \- query resource consumption limits
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <sys/resource.h>
int getrlimit(int \fIresource\fP, struct rlimit *\fIrlp\fP);
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
getrlimit queries the current resource limit regarding the specified
\fIresource\fP. This can be one of the following: RLIMIT_CORE, RLIMIT_CPU,
RLIMIT_DATA, RLIMIT_FSIZE, RLIMIT_NOFILE, RLIMIT_STACK or RLIMIT_AS.
The soft limit is specified in \fIrlp\fP\->rlim_cur and the hard limit in
\fIrlp\fP\->rlim_max. On MINIX, these are currently always the same.
A value of RLIM_INFINITY specifies that no limit is enforced, although
architectural limits may still apply.
.SH "RETURN VALUE
If the function succeeds, 0 is returned.
If the function fails, -1 is returned and errno is set to indicate the
cause of the failure.

68
man/man3/gets.3
View file

@ -1,68 +0,0 @@
.\" @(#)gets.3s 6.1 (Berkeley) 5/15/85
.\"
.TH GETS 3 "May 15, 1985"
.AT 3
.SH NAME
gets, fgets \- get a string from a stream
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <stdio.h>
char *gets(char *\fIs\fP)
char *fgets(char *\fIs\fP, int \fIn\fP, FILE *\fIstream\fP)
.ft R
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
.B Gets
reads a string into
.I s
from the standard input stream
.BR stdin .
The string is terminated by a newline
character, which is replaced in
.I s
by a null character.
.B Gets
returns its argument.
.PP
.B Fgets
reads
.IR n \-1
characters, or up through a newline
character, whichever comes first,
from the
.I stream
into the string
.IR s .
The last character read into
.I s
is followed by a null character.
.B Fgets
returns its first argument.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR puts (3),
.BR getc (3),
.BR scanf (3),
.BR fread (3),
.BR ferror (3).
.SH DIAGNOSTICS
.B Gets
and
.B fgets
return the constant pointer
.SM
.B NULL
upon end of file or error.
.SH BUGS
.B Gets
deletes a newline,
.B fgets
keeps it,
all in the name of backward compatibility.
.PP
.B Gets
is not present in the Minix-vmd C library for reasons that should be obvious.
Use
.B fgets
instead.

112
man/man3/getservent.3
View file

@ -1,112 +0,0 @@
.\" Copyright (c) 1983 Regents of the University of California.
.\" All rights reserved. The Berkeley software License Agreement
.\" specifies the terms and conditions for redistribution.
.\"
.\" @(#)getservent.3n 6.3 (Berkeley) 5/19/86
.\"
.TH GETSERVENT 3 "May 19, 1986"
.UC 5
.SH NAME
getservent, getservbyport, getservbyname, setservent, endservent \- get service entry
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <netdb.h>
.PP
.ft B
struct servent *getservent()
.PP
.ft B
struct servent *getservbyname(name, proto)
char *name, *proto;
.PP
.ft B
struct servent *getservbyport(port, proto)
int port; char *proto;
.PP
.ft B
setservent(stayopen)
int stayopen
.PP
.ft B
endservent()
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
.IR Getservent ,
.IR getservbyname ,
and
.I getservbyport
each return a pointer to an object with the
following structure
containing the broken-out
fields of a line in the network services data base,
.IR /etc/services .
.RS
.PP
.nf
struct servent {
char *s_name; /* official name of service */
char **s_aliases; /* alias list */
int s_port; /* port service resides at */
char *s_proto; /* protocol to use */
};
.ft R
.ad
.fi
.RE
.PP
The members of this structure are:
.TP \w's_aliases'u+2n
s_name
The official name of the service.
.TP \w's_aliases'u+2n
s_aliases
A zero terminated list of alternate names for the service.
.TP \w's_aliases'u+2n
s_port
The port number at which the service resides.
Port numbers are returned in network byte order.
.TP \w's_aliases'u+2n
s_proto
The name of the protocol to use when contacting the
service.
.PP
.I Getservent
reads the next line of the file, opening the file if necessary.
.PP
.I Setservent
opens and rewinds the file. If the
.I stayopen
flag is non-zero,
the net data base will not be closed after each call to
.I getservbyname
or
.IR getservbyport .
.PP
.I Endservent
closes the file.
.PP
.I Getservbyname
and
.I getservbyport
sequentially search from the beginning
of the file until a matching
protocol name or
port number is found,
or until EOF is encountered.
If a protocol name is also supplied (non-NULL),
searches must also match the protocol.
.SH FILES
/etc/services
.SH "SEE ALSO"
getprotoent(3), services(5)
.SH DIAGNOSTICS
Null pointer
(0) returned on EOF or error.
.SH BUGS
All information
is contained in a static area
so it must be copied if it is
to be saved. Expecting port
numbers to fit in a 32 bit
quantity is probably naive.

107
man/man3/getttyent.3
View file

@ -1,107 +0,0 @@
.TH GETTTYENT 3
.SH NAME
getttyent, getttynam, setttyent, endttyent \- interface to /etc/ttytab
.SH SYNOPSIS
.ft B
.nf
#include <ttyent.h>
struct ttyent *getttyent(void)
struct ttyent *getttynam(const char *\fIname\fP)
int setttyent(void)
void endttyent(void)
.fi
.ft P
.SH DESCRIPTION
The
.B getttyent
functions provide an interface to the /etc/ttytab. (See
.BR ttytab (5)).
.PP
To read one of these files one calls
.B getttyent()
several times to read the entries in the table until NULL is returned for
end-of-file.
.PP
.B Getttyname()
searches the
.B ttytab
file for the given terminal device. It is equivalent to a call to
.BR setttyent(),
several calls to
.B getttyent()
to locate the entry, and a final
.B endttyent()
to close the file.
.PP
.B Setttyent()
opens or rewinds the ttytab database, and
.B endttyent() closes it.
.B Getttyent()
opens the database if not already open, but does not close it.
.PP
The struct ttyent is defined by <ttyent.h> as follows:
.sp
.nf
.ta +4n +6n +15n
struct ttyent {
char *ty_name; /* Name of the terminal device. */
char *ty_type; /* Terminal type name (termcap(3)). */
char **ty_getty; /* Program to run, normally getty. */
char **ty_init; /* Initialization command, normally stty. */
};
.fi
.PP
A valid entry has at least two strings, so both
.B ty_name
and
.B ty_type
are filled in. The optional
.B ty_getty
and
.B ty_init
may be NULL (field omitted), point to a pointer that is NULL (null lenght
field, i.e. ""), or an array of strings terminated by a NULL (field
present). For now no useful distinction can be made between a omitted field
and an empty field, so treat both cases as an omission.
.SH FILES
.TP 15
.B /etc/ttytab
The terminal device database
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR ttyname (3),
.BR ttyslot (3),
.BR ttytab (5),
.BR init (8).
.SH DIAGNOSTICS
.B Setttyent()
has the same return value and error codes as the
.BR open (2)
call it uses to open the ttytab file. The
.BI get xxx ()
functions return NULL on end of file, entry not found, or error. You can
set
.B errno
to zero before the call and check it after.
.SH NOTES
.B Getttyent()
and
.B getttynam()
return a pointer to static storage that is overwritten in each call.
.PP
The MINIX 3
.B struct ttyent
has only the
.B ty_name
and
.B ty_type
fields in common with the BSD implementation. This does not seem to be a
problem, because most third party software that need to know about terminals
only look at the
.B ty_name
field.
.SH AUTHOR
Kees J. Bot (kjb@cs.vu.nl)
.\"
.\" $PchId: getttyent.3,v 1.2 1996/04/11 06:57:26 philip Exp $

60
man/man3/hton.3
View file

@ -1,60 +0,0 @@
.TH HTON 3
.SH NAME
hton, htons, htonl, ntohs, ntohl \- host to network byte order conversion
.SH SYNOPSIS
.ft B
.nf
#define _MINIX_SOURCE 1
#include <stddef.h>
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <net/hton.h>
u16_t htons(u16_t \fIhost_word\fP)
u32_t htonl(u32_t \fIhost_dword\fP)
u16_t ntohs(u16_t \fInetwork_word\fP)
u32_t ntohl(u32_t \fInetwork_dword\fP)
u16_t HTONS(u16_t \fIhost_word\fP)
u32_t HTONL(u32_t \fIhost_dword\fP)
u16_t NTOHS(u16_t \fInetwork_word\fP)
u32_t NTOHL(u32_t \fInetwork_dword\fP)
.fi
.ft R
.SH DESCRIPTION
These macros convert 16-bit and 32-bit quantities to and from the network
byte order used by the TCP/IP protocols.
The function of the macros is encoded in their name.
.B H
means host byte order,
.B n
means network byte order,
.B s
means a 16-bit quantity and
.B l
means a 32-bit quantity.
Thus
.B htons
converts a 16-bit quantity from host byte order to network byte order.
The difference between the lower case and upper case variants is that
the lower case variants evaluate the argument at most once and the
upper case variants can be used for constant folding.
That is,
.PP
.RS
htonl(f(x))
.RE
.PP
will call f(x) at most once and
.PP
.RS
HTONS(0x10)
.RE
.PP
will be equivalent to 0x10 on a big-endian machine and 0x1000 on a
little-endian machine.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR ip (4).
.SH AUTHOR
Philip Homburg (philip@cs.vu.nl)
.\"
.\" $PchId: hton.3,v 1.3 1996/02/22 21:10:01 philip Exp $

258
man/man3/int64.3
View file

@ -1,258 +0,0 @@
.TH INT64 3
.SH NAME
int64, add64, add64u, add64ul, sub64, sub64u, sub64ul, diff64, bsr64, cvu64, cvul64, cv64u, cv64ul, div64, div64u, div64u64, rem64, rem64u, mul64, mul64u, cmp64, cmp64u, cmp64ul, ex64lo, ex64hi, make64 \- 64 bit disk offset computations
.SH SYNOPSIS
.ft B
.nf
#include <minix/u64.h>
u64_t add64(u64_t \fIi\fP, u64_t \fIj\fP)
u64_t add64u(u64_t \fIi\fP, unsigned \fIj\fP)
u64_t add64ul(u64_t \fIi\fP, unsigned long \fIj\fP)
u64_t sub64(u64_t \fIi\fP, u64_t \fIj\fP)
u64_t sub64u(u64_t \fIi\fP, unsigned \fIj\fP)
u64_t sub64ul(u64_t \fIi\fP, unsigned long \fIj\fP)
unsigned diff64(u64_t \fIi\fP, u64_t \fIj\fP)
int bsr64(u64_t \fIi\fP)
u64_t cvu64(unsigned \fIi\fP)
u64_t cvul64(unsigned long \fIi\fP)
unsigned cv64u(u64_t \fIi\fP)
unsigned long cv64ul(u64_t \fIi\fP)
u64_t div64(u64_t \fIi\fP, u64_t \fIj\fP)
unsigned long div64u(u64_t \fIi\fP, unsigned \fIj\fP)
u64_t div64u64(u64_t \fIi\fP, unsigned \fIj\fP)
u64_t rem64(u64_t \fIi\fP, u64_t \fIj\fP)
unsigned rem64u(u64_t \fIi\fP, unsigned \fIj\fP)
u64_t mul64(u64_t \fIi\fP, u64_t \fIj\fP)
u64_t mul64u(unsigned long \fIi\fP, unsigned \fIj\fP)
int cmp64(u64_t \fIi\fP, u64_t \fIj\fP)
int cmp64u(u64_t \fIi\fP, unsigned \fIj\fP)
int cmp64ul(u64_t \fIi\fP, unsigned long \fIj\fP)
unsigned long ex64lo(u64_t \fIi\fP)
unsigned long ex64hi(u64_t \fIi\fP)
u64_t make64(unsigned long \fIlo\fP, unsigned long \fIhi\fP)
u64_t rrotate64(u64_t \fIi\fP, unsigned short \fIb\fP)
u64_t rshift64(u64_t \fIi\fP, unsigned short \fIb\fP)
u64_t xor64(u64_t \fIi\fP, u64_t \fIj\fP)
u64_t and64(u64_t \fIi\fP, u64_t \fIj\fP)
u64_t not64(u64_t \fIi\fP)
.fi
.ft P
.SH DESCRIPTION
.de SP
.if t .sp 0.4
.if n .sp
..
The
.B int64
family of functions allow MINIX 3 to handle disks of up to 4 terabytes using
32 bit sector numbers and 64 bit byte offsets on a machine where the C type
.B long
is 32 bits. The <minix/u64.h> include file defines a 64 bit data
type,
.BR u64_t ,
and a number of functions to operate on them. Note that these functions are
geared towards common disk offset and block computations, and do not provide
a full set of 64 bit operations. They are:
.PP
.TP
.B "u64_t add64(u64_t \fIi\fP, u64_t \fIj\fP)"
Add the 64 bit numbers
.I i
and
.I j
forming a 64 bit result.
.TP
.B "u64_t add64u(u64_t \fIi\fP, unsigned \fIj\fP)"
Add an unsigned
.I j
to a 64 bit number
.I i
forming a 64 bit result.
.TP
.B "u64_t add64ul(u64_t \fIi\fP, unsigned long \fIj\fP)"
Add an unsigned long
.I j
to a 64 bit number
.I i
forming a 64 bit result.
.TP
.B "u64_t sub64(u64_t \fIi\fP, u64_t \fIj\fP)"
Subtract the 64 bit number
.I j
from the 64 bit number
.I i
forming a 64 bit result.
.TP
.B "u64_t sub64u(u64_t \fIi\fP, unsigned \fIj\fP)"
Subtract the unsigned
.I j
from the 64 bit number
.I i
forming a 64 bit result.
.TP
.B "u64_t sub64ul(u64_t \fIi\fP, unsigned long \fIj\fP)"
Subtract the unsigned long
.I j
from the 64 bit number
.I i
forming a 64 bit result.
.TP
.B "unsigned diff64(u64_t \fIi\fP, u64_t \fIj\fP)"
Subtract the 64 bit number
.I j
from the 64 bit number
.I i
forming an unsigned. Overflow is not checked.
.TP
.B "int bsr64(u64_t \fIi\fP)"
Return the index of the highest-order bit set. If the value is zero, -1 is returned.
.TP
.B "u64_t cvu64(unsigned \fIi\fP)"
Convert an unsigned to a 64 bit number.
.TP
.B "u64_t cvul64(unsigned long \fIi\fP)"
Convert an unsigned long to a 64 bit number.
.TP
.B "unsigned cv64u(u64_t \fIi\fP)"
Convert a 64 bit number to an unsigned if it fits, otherwise return
.BR UINT_MAX .
.TP
.B "unsigned long cv64ul(u64_t \fIi\fP)"
Convert a 64 bit number to an unsigned long if it fits, otherwise return
.BR ULONG_MAX .
.TP
.B "u64_t div64(u64_t \fIi\fP, u64_t \fIj\fP)"
Divide the 64 bit number
.I i
by the 64 bit number
.I j
giving a 64 bit number.
.TP
.B "unsigned long div64u(u64_t \fIi\fP, unsigned \fIj\fP)"
Divide the 64 bit number
.I i
by the unsigned
.I j
giving an unsigned long. Overflow is not checked. (Typical "byte offset to
block number" conversion.)
.TP
.B "u64_t div64u64(u64_t \fIi\fP, unsigned \fIj\fP)"
Divide the 64 bit number
.I i
by the unsigned
.I j
giving a 64 bit number.
.TP
.B "u64_t rem64(u64_t \fIi\fP, u64_t \fIj\fP)"
Compute the remainder of the division of the 64 bit number
.I i
by the 64 bit number
.I j
as a 64 bit number.
.TP
.B "unsigned rem64u(u64_t \fIi\fP, unsigned \fIj\fP)"
Compute the remainder of the division of the 64 bit number
.I i
by the unsigned
.I j
as an unsigned. (Typical "byte offset within a block" computation.)
.TP
.B "u64_t mul64(u64_t \fIi\fP, u64_t \fIj\fP)"
Multiply the 64 bit number
.I i
by the 64 bit number
.I j
giving a 64 bit number.
.TP
.B "u64_t mul64u(unsigned long \fIi\fP, unsigned \fIj\fP)"
Multiply the unsigned long
.I i
by the unsigned
.I j
giving a 64 bit number. (Typical "block number to byte offset" conversion.)
.TP
.B "int cmp64(u64_t \fIi\fP, u64_t \fIj\fP)"
Compare two 64 bit numbers.
Returns
.B -1
if
.I i
<
.IR j ,
.B 0
if
.I i
==
.IR j ,
and
.B 1
if
.I i
>
.IR j .
.TP
.B "u64_t rrotate64(u64_t \fIi\fP, unsigned short \fIb\fP)"
Rotate first 64-bit argument to the right by \fIb\fP bits and
return the result.
.TP
.B "u64_t rshift64(u64_t \fIi\fP, unsigned short \fIb\fP)"
Shift first 64-bit argument to the right by \fIb\fP bits and
return the result.
.TP
.B "u64_t xor64(u64_t \fIi\fP, u64_t \fIj\fP)"
Return the 64-bit bitwise xor of the 64-bit \fIi\fP and \fIj\fP arguments.
.TP
.B "u64_t and64(u64_t \fIi\fP, u64_t \fIj\fP)"
Return the 64-bit bitwise and of the 64-bit \fIi\fP and \fIj\fP arguments.
.TP
.B "u64_t not64(u64_t \fIi\fP)"
Return the 64-bit bitwise not of the 64-bit \fIi\fP argument.
.TP
.B "int cmp64u(u64_t \fIi\fP, unsigned \fIj\fP)"
Likewise compare a 64 bit number with an unsigned.
.TP
.B "int cmp64ul(u64_t \fIi\fP, unsigned long \fIj\fP)"
Likewise compare a 64 bit number with an unsigned long.
.TP
.B "unsigned long ex64lo(u64_t \fIi\fP)"
Extract the low 32 bits of a 64 bit number.
.TP
.B "unsigned long ex64hi(u64_t \fIi\fP)"
Extract the high 32 bits of a 64 bit number.
.TP
.B "u64_t make64(unsigned long \fIlo\fP, unsigned long \fIhi\fP)"
Combine the low and high parts of a 64 bit number to a 64 bit number. (The
last three functions are used to pass 64 bit numbers in messages within the
kernel. They should not be used for anything else.)
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR fcntl (2),
.BR controller (4).
.SH NOTES
With the usual disk block size of 512 bytes the maximum disk size is 512
\(** 4 gigabytes = 2 terabytes.
.PP
Standard MINIX 3 only uses 64 bit computations within the disk drivers, so
individual partitions are still limited to 4 gigabytes. Minix-vmd has 64
bit computations also in the file system code.
.PP
Special care must be taken when accessing disk devices. For MINIX 3 one may
have to temporarily change the start of the partition to go beyond 4 G.
Minix-vmd can go beyond 4 G, but the
.B lseek
system call is still limited to a 32 bit offset. One needs to use
.PP
.RS
.BI "fcntl(" fd ", F_SEEK, u64_t " offset ")"
.RE
.PP
to seek to a 64 bit position.
.SH AUTHOR
Kees J. Bot <kjb@cs.vu.nl>

26
man/man3/islessgreater.3
View file

@ -1,26 +0,0 @@
.TH ISLESSGREATER 3 "December 18, 2009"
.UC 4
.SH NAME
islessgreater, isgreater, isgreaterequal, isless, islessequal, isunordered \- order floating point numbers
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <math.h>
int isgreater(double \fIx\fP, double \fIy\fP);
int isgreaterequal(double \fIx\fP, double \fIy\fP);
int isless(double \fIx\fP, double \fIy\fP);
int islessequal(double \fIx\fP, double \fIy\fP);
int islessgreater(double \fIx\fP, double \fIy\fP);
int isunordered(double \fIx\fP, double \fIy\fP);
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
These functions compare the specified floating point numbers \fIx\fP and
\fIy\fP. They differ from the regular comparison operators in that they
recognize and additional 'unordered' relationship between the numbers if one of
them is NaN. As a consequence, these functions do not raise floating point
expceptions and can be safely used with NaN values.
.SH "RETURN VALUE"
The functions return a non-zero value if and only if the relationship specified
in the name holds between \fIx\fP and \fIy\fP. All functions except for
'isunordered' return zero if either of the numbers is NaN.

19
man/man3/ldexp.3
View file

@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
.TH LDEXP 3 "January 7, 2010"
.UC 4
.SH NAME
ldexp, scalbn, scalbnf, scalbln, scalblnf \- compute absolute value
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <math.h>
double ldexp(double \fIx\fP, int \fIn\fP);
double scalbn(double \fIx\fP, int \fIn\fP);
float scalbnf(float \fIx\fP, int \fIn\fP);
double scalbln(double \fIx\fP, long \fIn\fP);
float scalblnf(float \fIx\fP, long \fIn\fP);
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
These functions all compute \fIx\fP * 2^\fIn\fP.
.SH "RETURN VALUE
These functions all return \fIx\fP * 2^\fIn\fP.

97
man/man3/makecontext.3
View file

@ -1,97 +0,0 @@
.Dd Mar 2, 2010
.Dt MAKECONTEXT 3
.Os
.Sh NAME
.Nm makecontext ,
.Nm swapcontext
.Nd manipulate user contexts
.Sh LIBRARY
.Lb libc
.Sh SYNOPSIS
.In ucontext.h
.Ft void
.Fn makecontext "ucontext_t *ucp" "void (*func)(void)" "int argc" ...
.Ft int
.Fn swapcontext "ucontext_t *oucp" "const ucontext_t *ucp"
.Sh DESCRIPTION
The
.Xr makecontext 3 ,
.Xr swapcontext 3 ,
.Xr getcontext 3 ,
and
.Xr setcontext 3
together form a set of functions that allow user-level context switching between multiple threads of control within a process.
.Pp
The
.Fn makecontext
function modifies the user thread pointed to by
.Va ucp
to continue execution by invoking function
.Va func
and passing that function a number of
.Va argc
integer arguments. The value of
.Va argc
must match the number of integer arguments passed to
.Va func ,
otherwise the behavior is undefined. Context
.Va ucp
must have been initialized by a call to
.Xr getcontext 3
and have a stack allocated for it. The address of the stack must be assigned to
.Va ucp->uc_stack.ss_sp
and the size of the stack to
.Va ucp->uc_stack.ss_size .
The
.Va ucp->uc_link
member is used to determine which successor context is run after the context modified by
.Fn makecontext
returns. If left NULL, the process exits.
.Pp
The
.Fn swapcontext
function saves the current context in the context structure pointed to by
.Va oucp
and sets the context to the context structure pointed to by
.Va ucp .
.Sh RETURN VALUES
When successful,
.Fn swapcontext
returns 0. Otherwise, -1 is returned and
.Va errno
is set to indicate the error. Note that a successful call to
.Fn swapcontext
actually does not return. Only after returning to the context that called
.Fn swapcontext ,
it appears as if
.Fn swapcontext
returned 0.
.Sh ERRORS
.Bl -tag -width Er
.It Bq Er EFAULT
Either the
.Va ucp
or
.Va oucp
is a NULL pointer.
.It Bq Er EINVAL
The context is not properly initialized.
.It Bq Er ENOMEM
The
.Va ucp
argument does not have enough stack left to complete the operation.
.El
.Sh SEE ALSO
.Xr getcontext 3 ,
.Xr setcontext 3
.Sh STANDARDS
The
.Fn makecontext ,
and
.Fn swapcontext
functions conform to
.St -xsh5
and
.St -p1003.1-2001 .
.Sh AUTHORS
Thomas Veerman

128
man/man3/malloc.3
View file

@ -1,128 +0,0 @@
.\" Copyright (c) 1980 Regents of the University of California.
.\" All rights reserved. The Berkeley software License Agreement
.\" specifies the terms and conditions for redistribution.
.\"
.\" @(#)malloc.3 6.3 (Berkeley) 5/14/86
.\"
.TH MALLOC 3 "May 14, 1986"
.UC 4
.SH NAME
malloc, free, realloc, calloc, alloca \- memory allocator
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <alloca.h>
void *malloc(size_t \fIsize\fP)
void free(void *\fIptr\fP)
void *realloc(void *\fIptr\fP, size_t \fIsize\fP)
void *calloc(size_t \fInelem\fP, size_t \fIelsize\fP)
void *alloca(size_t \fIsize\fP)
.ft R
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
.B Malloc
and
.B free
provide a general-purpose memory allocation package.
.B Malloc
returns a pointer to a block of at least
.I size
bytes beginning on a word boundary.
.PP
The argument to
.B free
is a pointer to a block previously allocated by
.BR malloc ;
this space is made available for further allocation,
but its contents are left undisturbed.
A call with a null
.I ptr
is legal and does nothing.
.PP
Needless to say, grave disorder will result if the space assigned by
.B malloc
is overrun or if some random number is handed to
.BR free .
.PP
.B Malloc
maintains multiple lists of free blocks according to size,
allocating space from the appropriate list.
It calls
.B sbrk
(see
.BR brk (2))
to get more memory from the system when there is no
suitable space already free.
.PP
.B Realloc
changes the size of the block pointed to by
.I ptr
to
.I size
bytes and returns a pointer to the (possibly moved) block.
The contents will be unchanged up to the lesser of the new and old sizes.
A call with a null
.I ptr
is legal and has the same result as
.BI malloc( size )\fR.
.PP
.B Calloc
allocates space for an array of
.I nelem
elements of size
.I elsize.
The space is initialized to zeros.
.PP
.B Alloca
allocates
.I size
bytes of space in the stack frame of the caller.
This temporary space is automatically freed on
return.
.PP
Each of the allocation routines returns a pointer
to space suitably aligned (after possible pointer coercion)
for storage of any type of object.
.PP
To debug malloc-related errors, specify the
.I MALLOC_DEBUG
variable in the environment of the program you want to debug. This causes an
alternate malloc implementation to be used. This version allocates blocks at
the end of random pages so that reads and writes past the end of the buffer
cause SIGSEGV. On realloc or free calls, the area just before the buffer is
verified to also detect writes before the start of the buffer. Buffer overflows
in the BSS section are also more likely to be detected because the brk is never
moved. Please note that this flags comes with a considerable performance
penalty and dramatically increases memory usage.
.SH SEE ALSO
.BR brk (2).
.SH DIAGNOSTICS
.BR Malloc ,
.BR realloc
and
.B calloc
return a null pointer if there is no available memory or if the arena
has been detectably corrupted by storing outside the bounds of a block.
.SH NOTES
Other implementations of
.BR malloc ,
.BR realloc
or
.BR calloc
may return a null pointer if the size of the requested block is zero. This
implementation will always return a zero length block at a unique address,
but you should keep in mind that a null return is possible if the program
is run to another system and that this should not be mistakenly seen as
an error.
.SH BUGS
When
.B realloc
returns a null pointer, the block pointed to by
.I ptr
may be destroyed.
.PP
.B Alloca
is machine dependent; its use is discouraged.

130
man/man3/md5.3
View file

@ -1,130 +0,0 @@
.\"
.\" ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
.\" "THE BEER-WARE LICENSE" (Revision 42):
.\" <phk@login.dkuug.dk> wrote this file. As long as you retain this notice you
.\" can do whatever you want with this stuff. If we meet some day, and you think
.\" this stuff is worth it, you can buy me a beer in return. Poul-Henning Kamp
.\" ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
.\"
.\" $OpenBSD: md5.3,v 1.10 2007/05/31 19:19:29 jmc Exp $
.\"
.Dd $Mdocdate: May 31 2007 $
.Dt MD5 3
.Os
.Sh NAME
.Nm MD5Init ,
.Nm MD5Update ,
.Nm MD5Final ,
.Nm MD5End ,
.Nm MD5File ,
.Nm MD5Data
.Nd calculate the RSA Data Security, Inc., ``MD5'' message digest
.Sh SYNOPSIS
.Fd #include <sys/types.h>
.Fd #include <minix/md5.h>
.Ft void
.Fn MD5Init "MD5_CTX *context"
.Ft void
.Fn MD5Update "MD5_CTX *context" "const u_int8_t *data" "size_t len"
.Ft void
.Fn MD5Final "u_int8_t digest[MD5_DIGEST_LENGTH]" "MD5_CTX *context"
.Ft "char *"
.Fn MD5End "MD5_CTX *context" "char *buf"
.Ft "char *"
.Fn MD5File "const char *filename" "char *buf"
.Ft "char *"
.Fn MD5Data "const u_int8_t *data" "size_t len" "char *buf"
.Sh DESCRIPTION
The MD5 functions calculate a 128-bit cryptographic checksum (digest)
for any number of input bytes.
A cryptographic checksum is a one-way
hash-function, that is, you cannot find (except by exhaustive search)
the input corresponding to a particular output.
This net result is a
.Dq fingerprint
of the input-data, which doesn't disclose the actual input.
.Pp
The
.Fn MD5Init ,
.Fn MD5Update ,
and
.Fn MD5Final
functions are the core functions.
Allocate an MD5_CTX, initialize it with
.Fn MD5Init ,
run over the data with
.Fn MD5Update ,
and finally extract the result using
.Fn MD5Final .
.Pp
.Fn MD5End
is a wrapper for
.Fn MD5Final
which converts the return value to an MD5_DIGEST_STRING_LENGTH-character
(including the terminating '\e0')
.Tn ASCII
string which represents the 128 bits in hexadecimal.
.Pp
.Fn MD5File
calculates the digest of a file, and uses
.Fn MD5End
to return the result.
If the file cannot be opened, a null pointer is returned.
.Pp
.Fn MD5Data
calculates the digest of a chunk of data in memory, and uses
.Fn MD5End
to return the result.
.Pp
When using
.Fn MD5End ,
.Fn MD5File ,
or
.Fn MD5Data ,
the
.Ar buf
argument can be a null pointer, in which case the returned string
is allocated with
.Xr malloc 3
and subsequently must be explicitly deallocated using
.Xr free 3
after use.
If the
.Ar buf
argument is non-null it must point to at least MD5_DIGEST_STRING_LENGTH
characters of buffer space.
.Rs
.%A R. Rivest
.%T The MD4 Message-Digest Algorithm
.%O RFC 1186
.Re
.Rs
.%A R. Rivest
.%T The MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm
.%O RFC 1321
.Re
.Rs
.%A RSA Laboratories
.%T Frequently Asked Questions About today's Cryptography
.%O \&<http://www.rsa.com/rsalabs/faq/>
.Re
.Rs
.%A H. Dobbertin
.%T Alf Swindles Ann
.%J CryptoBytes
.%N 1(3):5
.%D 1995
.Re
.Rs
.%A MJ. B. Robshaw
.%T On Recent Results for MD4 and MD5
.%J RSA Laboratories Bulletin
.%N 4
.%D November 12, 1996
.Re
.Rs
.%A Hans Dobbertin
.%T Cryptanalysis of MD5 Compress
.Re
.Sh BUGS
Collisions have been found for the full version of MD5.

28
man/man3/nearbyint.3
View file

@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
.TH NEARBYINT 3 "December 18, 2009"
.UC 4
.SH NAME
nearbyint, ceil, floor, trunc \- floating point rounding
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <math.h>
double ceil(double \fIx\fP);
double floor(double \fIx\fP);
double nearbyint(double \fIx\fP);
double trunc(double \fIx\fP);
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
These functions round the specified floating point number to a nearby integer.
For nearbyint, the rounding mode is determined by the value set using the
fesetround function. The other functions are not influenced by the rounding
mode. The ceil function rounds upwards, selecting the smallest integer that is
larger than or equal to \fIx\fP. The floor function rounds downwards, selecting
the largest integer that is smaller than or equal to \fIx\fP. The trunc function
rounds towards zero, selecting the largest integer with the largest absolute
value of which the absolute value is smaller than or equal to the absolute
value of \fIx\fP.
.SH "RETURN VALUE"
The functions return an integer close to \fIx\fP.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
fesetround(3)

237
man/man3/newctime.3
View file

@ -1,237 +0,0 @@
.TH NEWCTIME 3
.SH NAME
asctime, ctime, difftime, gmtime, localtime, mktime \- convert date and time to ASCII
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.B extern char *tzname[2];
.PP
.B void tzset()
.PP
.B #include <sys/types.h>
.PP
.B char *ctime(clock)
.B const time_t *clock;
.PP
.B double difftime(time1, time0)
.B time_t time1;
.B time_t time0;
.PP
.B #include <time.h>
.PP
.B char *asctime(tm)
.B const struct tm *tm;
.PP
.B struct tm *localtime(clock)
.B const time_t *clock;
.PP
.B struct tm *gmtime(clock)
.B const time_t *clock;
.PP
.B time_t mktime(tm)
.B struct tm *tm;
.PP
.B cc ... -ltz
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
.I Ctime\^
converts a long integer, pointed to by
.IR clock ,
representing the time in seconds since
00:00:00 UTC, 1970-01-01,
and returns a pointer to a
string of the form
.br
.ce
.eo
Thu Nov 24 18:22:48 1986\n\0
.br
.ec
Years requiring fewer than four characters are padded with leading zeroes.
For years longer than four characters, the string is of the form
.br
.ce
.eo
Thu Nov 24 18:22:48 81986\n\0
.ec
.br
with five spaces before the year.
These unusual formats are designed to make it less likely that older
software that expects exactly 26 bytes of output will mistakenly output
misleading values for out-of-range years.
.PP
.I Localtime\^
and
.I gmtime\^
return pointers to ``tm'' structures, described below.
.I Localtime\^
corrects for the time zone and any time zone adjustments
(such as Daylight Saving Time in the United States).
After filling in the ``tm'' structure,
.I localtime
sets the
.BR tm_isdst 'th
element of
.B tzname
to a pointer to an
ASCII string that's the time zone abbreviation to be used with
.IR localtime 's
return value.
.PP
.I Gmtime\^
converts to Coordinated Universal Time.
.PP
.I Asctime\^
converts a time value contained in a
``tm'' structure to a string,
as shown in the above example,
and returns a pointer to the string.
.PP
.I Mktime\^
converts the broken-down time,
expressed as local time,
in the structure pointed to by
.I tm
into a calendar time value with the same encoding as that of the values
returned by the
.I time
function.
The original values of the
.B tm_wday
and
.B tm_yday
components of the structure are ignored,
and the original values of the other components are not restricted
to their normal ranges.
(A positive or zero value for
.B tm_isdst
causes
.I mktime
to presume initially that summer time (for example, Daylight Saving Time
in the U.S.A.)
respectively,
is or is not in effect for the specified time.
A negative value for
.B tm_isdst
causes the
.I mktime
function to attempt to divine whether summer time is in effect
for the specified time.)
On successful completion, the values of the
.B tm_wday
and
.B tm_yday
components of the structure are set appropriately,
and the other components are set to represent the specified calendar time,
but with their values forced to their normal ranges; the final value of
.B tm_mday
is not set until
.B tm_mon
and
.B tm_year
are determined.
.I Mktime\^
returns the specified calendar time;
If the calendar time cannot be represented,
it returns
.BR -1 .
.PP
.I Difftime\^
returns the difference between two calendar times,
.RI ( time1
-
.IR time0 ),
expressed in seconds.
.PP
Declarations of all the functions and externals, and the ``tm'' structure,
are in the
.B <time.h>\^
header file.
The structure (of type)
.B struct tm
includes the following fields:
.RS
.PP
.nf
.ta .5i +\w'long tm_gmtoff;\0\0'u
int tm_sec; /\(** seconds (0 - 60) \(**/
int tm_min; /\(** minutes (0 - 59) \(**/
int tm_hour; /\(** hours (0 - 23) \(**/
int tm_mday; /\(** day of month (1 - 31) \(**/
int tm_mon; /\(** month of year (0 - 11) \(**/
int tm_year; /\(** year \- 1900 \(**/
int tm_wday; /\(** day of week (Sunday = 0) \(**/
int tm_yday; /\(** day of year (0 - 365) \(**/
int tm_isdst; /\(** is summer time in effect? \(**/
char \(**tm_zone; /\(** abbreviation of timezone name \(**/
long tm_gmtoff; /\(** offset from UTC in seconds \(**/
.fi
.RE
.PP
The
.I tm_zone
and
.I tm_gmtoff
fields exist, and are filled in, only if arrangements to do
so were made when the library containing these functions was
created.
There is no guarantee that these fields will continue to exist
in this form in future releases of this code.
.PP
.I Tm_isdst\^
is non-zero if summer time is in effect.
.PP
.I Tm_gmtoff
is the offset (in seconds) of the time represented
from UTC, with positive values indicating east
of the Prime Meridian.
.SH FILES
.ta \w'/usr/share/zoneinfo/posixrules\0\0'u
/usr/share/zoneinfo time zone information directory
.br
/usr/share/zoneinfo/localtime local time zone file
.br
/usr/share/zoneinfo/posixrules used with POSIX-style TZ's
.br
/usr/share/zoneinfo/GMT for UTC leap seconds
.sp
If
.B /usr/share/zoneinfo/GMT
is absent,
UTC leap seconds are loaded from
.BR /usr/share/zoneinfo/posixrules .
.SH SEE ALSO
getenv(3),
newstrftime(3),
newtzset(3),
time(2),
tzfile(5)
.SH NOTES
The return values point to static data;
the data is overwritten by each call.
The
.B tm_zone
field of a returned
.B "struct tm"
points to a static array of characters, which
will also be overwritten at the next call
(and by calls to
.IR tzset ).
.PP
.I Asctime\^
and
.I ctime\^
behave strangely for years before 1000 or after 9999.
The 1989 and 1999 editions of the C Standard say
that years from \-99 through 999 are converted without
extra spaces, but this conflicts with longstanding
tradition and with this implementation.
Traditional implementations of these two functions are
restricted to years in the range 1900 through 2099.
To avoid this portability mess, new programs should use
.I strftime\^
instead.
.PP
Avoid using out-of-range values with
.I mktime
when setting up lunch with promptness sticklers in Riyadh.
.\" @(#)newctime.3 7.17

230
man/man3/newstrftime.3
View file

@ -1,230 +0,0 @@
.\" Based on the UCB file whose copyright information appears below.
.\" Copyright (c) 1989, 1991 The Regents of the University of California.
.\" All rights reserved.
.\"
.\" This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
.\" the American National Standards Committee X3, on Information
.\" Processing Systems.
.\"
.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
.\" are met:
.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
.\" must display the following acknowledgement:
.\" This product includes software developed by the University of
.\" California, Berkeley and its contributors.
.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
.\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
.\" without specific prior written permission.
.\"
.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
.\"
.\" from: @(#)strftime.3 5.12 (Berkeley) 6/29/91
.\" $Id: strftime.3,v 1.4 1993/12/15 20:33:00 jtc Exp $
.\"
.TH NEWSTRFTIME 3
.SH NAME
strftime \- format date and time
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.B #include <sys/types.h>
.B #include <time.h>
.PP
.B size_t strftime(buf, maxsize, format, timeptr)
.B char *buf;
.B size_t maxsize;
.B const char *format;
.B const struct tm *timeptr
.PP
.B cc ... -ltz
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
The
.I strftime\^
function formats the information from
.I timeptr\^
into the buffer
.I buf\^
according to the string pointed to by
.IR format\^ .
.PP
The
.I format\^
string consists of zero or more conversion specifications and
ordinary characters.
All ordinary characters are copied directly into the buffer.
A conversion specification consists of a percent sign
.Ql %
and one other character.
.PP
No more than
.I maxsize\^
characters are be placed into the array.
If the total number of resulting characters, including the terminating
null character, is not more than
.IR maxsize\^ ,
.I strftime\^
returns the number of characters in the array, not counting the
terminating null.
Otherwise, zero is returned.
.PP
Each conversion specification is replaced by the characters as
follows which are then copied into the buffer.
.TP
%A
is replaced by the locale's full weekday name.
.TP
%a
is replaced by the locale's abbreviated weekday name.
.TP
%B
is replaced by the locale's full month name.
.TP
%b or %h
is replaced by the locale's abbreviated month name.
.TP
%C
is replaced by the century (a year divided by 100 and truncated to an integer)
as a decimal number (00-99).
.TP
%c
is replaced by the locale's appropriate date and time representation.
.TP
%D
is replaced by the date in the format %m/%d/%y.
.TP
%d
is replaced by the day of the month as a decimal number (01-31).
.TP
%e
is replaced by the day of month as a decimal number (1-31);
single digits are preceded by a blank.
.TP
%F
is replaced by the date in the format %Y-%m-%d.
.TP
%G
is replaced by the ISO 8601 year with century as a decimal number.
.TP
%g
is replaced by the ISO 8601 year without century as a decimal number (00-99).
.TP
%H
is replaced by the hour (24-hour clock) as a decimal number (00-23).
.TP
%I
is replaced by the hour (12-hour clock) as a decimal number (01-12).
.TP
%j
is replaced by the day of the year as a decimal number (001-366).
.TP
%k
is replaced by the hour (24-hour clock) as a decimal number (0-23);
single digits are preceded by a blank.
.TP
%l
is replaced by the hour (12-hour clock) as a decimal number (1-12);
single digits are preceded by a blank.
.TP
%M
is replaced by the minute as a decimal number (00-59).
.TP
%m
is replaced by the month as a decimal number (01-12).
.TP
%n
is replaced by a newline.
.TP
%p
is replaced by the locale's equivalent of either AM or PM.
.TP
%R
is replaced by the time in the format %H:%M.
.TP
%r
is replaced by the locale's representation of 12-hour clock time
using AM/PM notation.
.TP
%S
is replaced by the second as a decimal number (00-60).
.TP
%s
is replaced by the number of seconds since the Epoch, UTC (see mktime(3)).
.TP
%T
is replaced by the time in the format %H:%M:%S.
.TP
%t
is replaced by a tab.
.TP
%U
is replaced by the week number of the year (Sunday as the first day of
the week) as a decimal number (00-53).
.TP
%u
is replaced by the weekday (Monday as the first day of the week)
as a decimal number (1-7).
.TP
%V
is replaced by the week number of the year (Monday as the first day of
the week) as a decimal number (01-53). If the week containing January
1 has four or more days in the new year, then it is week 1; otherwise
it is week 53 of the previous year, and the next week is week 1.
.TP
%W
is replaced by the week number of the year (Monday as the first day of
the week) as a decimal number (00-53).
.TP
%w
is replaced by the weekday (Sunday as the first day of the week)
as a decimal number (0-6).
.TP
%X
is replaced by the locale's appropriate time representation.
.TP
%x
is replaced by the locale's appropriate date representation.
.TP
%Y
is replaced by the year with century as a decimal number.
.TP
%y
is replaced by the year without century as a decimal number (00-99).
.TP
%Z
is replaced by the time zone name,
or by the empty string if this is not determinable.
.TP
%z
is replaced by the offset from UTC in the format +HHMM or -HHMM as appropriate,
with positive values representing locations east of Greenwich,
or by the empty string if this is not determinable.
.TP
%%
is replaced by a single %.
.TP
%+
is replaced by the date and time in date(1) format.
.SH SEE ALSO
date(1),
getenv(3),
newctime(3),
newtzset(3),
time(2),
tzfile(5)
.\" @(#)newstrftime.3 7.15

237
man/man3/newtzset.3
View file

@ -1,237 +0,0 @@
.TH NEWTZSET 3
.SH NAME
tzset \- initialize time conversion information
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.B void tzset()
.PP
.B cc ... -ltz
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
.I Tzset
uses the value of the environment variable
.B TZ
to set time conversion information used by
.IR localtime .
If
.B TZ
does not appear in the environment,
the best available approximation to local wall clock time, as specified
by the
.IR tzfile (5)-format
file
.B localtime
in the system time conversion information directory, is used by
.IR localtime .
If
.B TZ
appears in the environment but its value is a null string,
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) is used (without leap second
correction). If
.B TZ
appears in the environment and its value is not a null string:
.IP
if the value begins with a colon, it is used as a pathname of a file
from which to read the time conversion information;
.IP
if the value does not begin with a colon, it is first used as the
pathname of a file from which to read the time conversion information,
and, if that file cannot be read, is used directly as a specification of
the time conversion information.
.PP
When
.B TZ
is used as a pathname, if it begins with a slash,
it is used as an absolute pathname; otherwise,
it is used as a pathname relative to a system time conversion information
directory.
The file must be in the format specified in
.IR tzfile (5).
.PP
When
.B TZ
is used directly as a specification of the time conversion information,
it must have the following syntax (spaces inserted for clarity):
.IP
\fIstd\|offset\fR[\fIdst\fR[\fIoffset\fR][\fB,\fIrule\fR]]
.PP
Where:
.RS
.TP 15
.IR std " and " dst
Three or more bytes that are the designation for the standard
.RI ( std )
or summer
.RI ( dst )
time zone. Only
.I std
is required; if
.I dst
is missing, then summer time does not apply in this locale.
Upper- and lowercase letters are explicitly allowed. Any characters
except a leading colon
.RB ( : ),
digits, comma
.RB ( , ),
minus
.RB ( \(mi ),
plus
.RB ( \(pl ),
and ASCII NUL are allowed.
.TP
.I offset
Indicates the value one must add to the local time to arrive at
Coordinated Universal Time. The
.I offset
has the form:
.RS
.IP
\fIhh\fR[\fB:\fImm\fR[\fB:\fIss\fR]]
.RE
.IP
The minutes
.RI ( mm )
and seconds
.RI ( ss )
are optional. The hour
.RI ( hh )
is required and may be a single digit. The
.I offset
following
.I std
is required. If no
.I offset
follows
.IR dst ,
summer time is assumed to be one hour ahead of standard time. One or
more digits may be used; the value is always interpreted as a decimal
number. The hour must be between zero and 24, and the minutes (and
seconds) \(em if present \(em between zero and 59. If preceded by a
.RB `` \(mi '',
the time zone shall be east of the Prime Meridian; otherwise it shall be
west (which may be indicated by an optional preceding
.RB `` \(pl '').
.TP
.I rule
Indicates when to change to and back from summer time. The
.I rule
has the form:
.RS
.IP
\fIdate\fB/\fItime\fB,\fIdate\fB/\fItime\fR
.RE
.IP
where the first
.I date
describes when the change from standard to summer time occurs and the
second
.I date
describes when the change back happens. Each
.I time
field describes when, in current local time, the change to the other
time is made.
.IP
The format of
.I date
is one of the following:
.RS
.TP 10
.BI J n
The Julian day
.I n
.RI "(1\ \(<=" "\ n\ " "\(<=\ 365).
Leap days are not counted; that is, in all years \(em including leap
years \(em February 28 is day 59 and March 1 is day 60. It is
impossible to explicitly refer to the occasional February 29.
.TP
.I n
The zero-based Julian day
.RI "(0\ \(<=" "\ n\ " "\(<=\ 365).
Leap days are counted, and it is possible to refer to February 29.
.TP
.BI M m . n . d
The
.IR d' th
day
.RI "(0\ \(<=" "\ d\ " "\(<=\ 6)
of week
.I n
of month
.I m
of the year
.RI "(1\ \(<=" "\ n\ " "\(<=\ 5,
.RI "1\ \(<=" "\ m\ " "\(<=\ 12,
where week 5 means ``the last
.I d
day in month
.IR m ''
which may occur in either the fourth or the fifth week). Week 1 is the
first week in which the
.IR d' th
day occurs. Day zero is Sunday.
.RE
.IP "" 15
The
.I time
has the same format as
.I offset
except that no leading sign
.RB (`` \(mi ''
or
.RB `` \(pl '')
is allowed. The default, if
.I time
is not given, is
.BR 02:00:00 .
.RE
.LP
If no
.I rule
is present in
.BR TZ ,
the rules specified
by the
.IR tzfile (5)-format
file
.B posixrules
in the system time conversion information directory are used, with the
standard and summer time offsets from UTC replaced by those specified by
the
.I offset
values in
.BR TZ .
.PP
For compatibility with System V Release 3.1, a semicolon
.RB ( ; )
may be used to separate the
.I rule
from the rest of the specification.
.PP
If the
.B TZ
environment variable does not specify a
.IR tzfile (5)-format
and cannot be interpreted as a direct specification,
UTC is used.
.SH FILES
.ta \w'/usr/share/zoneinfo/posixrules\0\0'u
/usr/share/zoneinfo time zone information directory
.br
/usr/share/zoneinfo/localtime local time zone file
.br
/usr/share/zoneinfo/posixrules used with POSIX-style TZ's
.br
/usr/share/zoneinfo/GMT for UTC leap seconds
.sp
If
.B /usr/share/zoneinfo/GMT
is absent,
UTC leap seconds are loaded from
.BR /usr/share/zoneinfo/posixrules .
.SH SEE ALSO
getenv(3),
newctime(3),
newstrftime(3),
time(2),
tzfile(5)
.\" @(#)newtzset.3 7.5

45
man/man3/oneC_sum.3
View file

@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
.TH ONEC_SUM 3
.SH NAME
oneC_sum \- One's complement internet checksum
.SH SYNOPSIS
.ft B
.nf
#define _MINIX_SOURCE 1
#include <stddef.h>
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <net/gen/oneCsum.h>
u16_t oneC_sum(u16_t \fIprev\fP, void *\fIdata\fP, size_t \fIsize\fP)
.fi
.ft R
.SH DESCRIPTION
.B OneC_sum
is used to calculate the one's complement checksum needed for IP network
packets.
A good document about the Internet Checksum is RFC-1071 (Computing the
Internet checksum).
.PP
.B OneC_sum
expects three parameters:
.TP 10
.I prev
The checksum of previous blocks of data that are to be included in the
checksum.
The value of prev in first call to oneC_sum should be 0.
.TP
.I data
A pointer to the block of data.
The data is interpreted as a series of 16 bit numbers in network byte order, but
an odd number of bytes is also allowed.
.TP
.I size
The size of the data in bytes.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR ip (4).
.br
.B RFC-1071
.SH AUTHOR
Philip Homburg (philip@cs.vu.nl)
.\"
.\" $PchId: oneC_sum.3,v 1.3 1996/02/22 21:05:31 philip Exp $

18
man/man3/openpty.3
View file

@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
.TH OPENPTY 3 "May 15, 1985"
.AT 3
.SH NAME
openpty \- library call to obtain a pty
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <libutil.h>
int openpty(int *\fIamaster\fP, int *\fIaslave\fP, char *\fIname\fP, struct termios *\fItermp\fP, struct winsize *\fIwinp\fP)
.ft R
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
.B Openpty
tries to obtain pty file descriptors by opening /dev/ttypX and
/dev/ptypX, setting *\fIamaster\fP and *\fIaslave\fP to these fd's,
changing ownership of the slave pty to the current process, and making
it only group-writable by group tty.

51
man/man3/popen.3
View file

@ -1,51 +0,0 @@
.\" @(#)popen.3 6.1 (Berkeley) 5/15/85
.\"
.TH POPEN 3 "May 15, 1985"
.AT 3
.SH NAME
popen, pclose \- initiate I/O to/from a process
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <stdio.h>
FILE *popen(const char *command, const char *type)
int pclose(FILE *stream)
.SH DESCRIPTION
The arguments to
.B popen
are pointers to null-terminated strings containing respectively a
shell command line and an I/O mode, either "r" for reading or "w" for
writing. It creates a pipe between the calling process and
the command to be executed. The value returned is a stream pointer that
can be used (as appropriate) to write to the standard input
of the command or read from its standard output.
.PP
A stream opened by
.B popen
should be closed by
.BR pclose ,
which waits for the associated process to terminate
and returns the exit status of the command.
.PP
Because open files are shared, a type "r" command may be used as an input
filter, and a type "w" as an output filter.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR pipe (2),
.BR fopen (3),
.BR fclose (3),
.BR system (3),
.BR wait (2),
.BR sh (1).
.SH DIAGNOSTICS
.B Popen
returns a null pointer if files or processes cannot be created, or the shell
cannot be accessed.
.SH BUGS
Buffered reading before opening an input filter
may leave the standard input of that filter mispositioned.
Similar problems with an output filter may be
forestalled by careful buffer flushing, for instance, with
.BR fflush ,
see
.BR fclose (3).

264
man/man3/printf.3
View file

@ -1,264 +0,0 @@
.\" @(#)printf.3s 6.3 (Berkeley) 6/5/86
.\"
.TH PRINTF 3 "June 5, 1986"
.AT 3
.SH NAME
printf, fprintf, sprintf, snprintf, vprintf, vfprintf, vsprintf, vsnprintf \- formatted output conversion
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdarg.h>
int printf(const char *\fIformat\fP \fR[\fP, \fIarg\fP\fR] ...\fP);
int fprintf(FILE *\fIstream\fP, const char *\fIformat\fP \fR[\fP, \fIarg\fP\fR] ...\fP);
int sprintf(char *\fIs\fP, const char *\fIformat\fP \fR[\fP, \fIarg\fP\fR] ...\fP);
int snprintf(char *\fIs\fP, size_t \fIn\fP, const char *\fIformat\fP \fR[\fP, \fIarg\fP\fR] ...\fP);
int vprintf(const char *\fIformat\fP, va_list \fIargs\fP);
int vfprintf(FILE *\fIstream\fP, const char *\fIformat\fP, va_list \fIargs\fP);
int vsprintf(char *\fIs\fP, const char *\fIformat\fP, va_list \fIargs\fP);
int vsnprintf(char *\fIs\fP, size_t \fIn\fP, const char *\fIformat\fP, va_list \fIargs\fP);
.ft R
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
.B Printf
places output on the standard output stream
.BR stdout .
.B Fprintf
places output on the named output
.IR stream .
.B Sprintf
places `output' in the string
.IR s ,
followed by the character `\e0'.
.B Snprintf
(Minix-vmd only)
is like
.B sprintf
except that no more than
.IR n \-1
characters are written to
.I s
followed by a `\e0'.
.PP
The
.B v*printf
functions can be used to make functions like the first four by using the
.BR stdarg (3)
method to process the argument.
.PP
Each of these functions converts, formats, and prints its arguments after
the first under control of the first argument.
The first argument is a character string which contains two types of objects:
plain characters, which are simply copied to the output stream,
and conversion specifications, each of which causes conversion and printing
of the next successive
.IR arg .
.PP
Each conversion specification is introduced by the character
.BR % .
The remainder of the conversion specification includes
in the following order
.TP
\(bu
Zero or more of following flags:
.RS
.TP
\(bu
a `#' character
specifying that the value should be converted to an ``alternate form''.
For
.BR c ,
.BR d ,
.BR s ,
and
.BR u
conversions, this option has no effect. For
.B o
conversions, the precision of the number is increased to force the first
character of the output string to a zero. For
.BR x ( X )
conversion, a non-zero result has the string
.BR 0x ( 0X )
prepended to it. For
.BR e ,
.BR E ,
.BR f ,
.BR g ,
and
.BR G
conversions, the result will always contain a decimal point, even if no
digits follow the point (normally, a decimal point only appears in the
results of those conversions if a digit follows the decimal point). For
.B g
and
.B G
conversions, trailing zeros are not removed from the result as they
would otherwise be.
.TP
\(bu
a minus sign `\-' which specifies
.I "left adjustment"
of the converted value in the indicated field;
.TP
\(bu
a `+' character specifying that there should always be
a sign placed before the number when using signed conversions.
.TP
\(bu
a space specifying that a blank should be left before a positive number
during a signed conversion. A `+' overrides a space if both are used.
.RE
.TP
\(bu
an optional digit string specifying a
.I "field width;"
if the converted value has fewer characters than the field width
it will be blank-padded on the left (or right,
if the left-adjustment indicator has been given) to make up the field width;
if the field width begins with a zero,
zero-padding will be done instead of blank-padding;
.TP
\(bu
an optional period
.RB ` . '
which serves to separate the field width from the next digit string;
.TP
\(bu
an optional digit string specifying a
.I precision
which specifies the number of digits to appear after the
decimal point, for e- and f-conversion, or the maximum number of characters
to be printed from a string;
.TP
\(bu
the character
.B l
specifying that a following
.BR d ,
.BR o ,
.BR x ,
or
.B u
corresponds to a long integer
.IR arg .
.TP
\(bu
a character which indicates the type of
conversion to be applied.
.PP
A field width or precision may be `*' instead of a digit string.
In this case an integer
.I arg
supplies
the field width or precision.
.PP
The conversion characters
and their meanings are
.TP
.B dox
The integer
.I arg
is converted to decimal, octal, or
hexadecimal notation respectively.
.TP
.B X
Like
.BR x ,
but use upper case instead of lower case.
.TP
.B f
The float or double
.I arg
is converted to decimal notation
in the style `[\fB\-\fR]ddd.ddd'
where the number of d's after the decimal point
is equal to the precision specification
for the argument.
If the precision
is missing,
6 digits are given;
if the precision is explicitly 0, no digits and
no decimal point are printed.
.TP
.B e
The float or double
.I arg
is converted in the style
`[\fB\-\fR]d\fB.\fRddd\fBe\fR\(+-dd'
where there is one digit before the decimal point and
the number after is equal to the
precision specification for the argument;
when the precision is missing,
6 digits are produced.
.TP
.B g
The float or double
.I arg
is printed in style
.BR d ,
in style
.BR f ,
or in
style
.BR e ,
whichever gives full precision in minimum space.
.TP
.B c
The character
.I arg
is printed.
.TP
.B s
.I Arg
is taken to be a string (character pointer)
and characters from the string are printed until
a null character or until
the number of characters indicated by the precision
specification is reached;
however if the precision is 0 or missing
all characters up to a null are printed.
.TP
.B u
The unsigned integer
.I arg
is converted to decimal
and printed.
.TP
.B %
Print a `%'; no argument is converted.
.PP
In no case does a non-existent or small field width
cause truncation of a field;
padding takes place only if the specified field
width exceeds the actual width.
Characters generated by
.B printf
are printed by
.BR putc (3).
.PP
.B Examples
.br
To print a date and time in the form `Sunday, July 3, 10:02',
where
.I weekday
and
.I month
are pointers to null-terminated strings:
.PP
.RS
printf("%s, %s %d, %02d:%02d", weekday, month, day, hour, min);
.RE
.PP
To print
.if n pi
.if t \(*p
to 5 decimals:
.IP
printf("pi = %.5f", 4*atan(1.0));
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR putc (3),
.BR scanf (3),
.BR ecvt (3),
.BR stdarg (3).

70
man/man3/putc.3
View file

@ -1,70 +0,0 @@
.\" @(#)putc.3s 6.2 (Berkeley) 11/6/85
.\"
.TH PUTC 3 "November 6, 1985"
.AT 3
.SH NAME
putc, putchar, fputc, putw \- put character or word on a stream
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <stdio.h>
int putc(int \fIc\fP, FILE *\fIstream\fP)
int putchar(int \fIc\fP)
int fputc(int \fIc\fP, FILE *\fIstream\fP)
int putw(int \fIw\fP, FILE *\fIstream\fP)
.ft R
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
.B Putc
appends the character
.I c
to the named output
.IR stream .
It returns the character written.
.PP
.BI Putchar( c )
is defined as
.BI putc( c ", stdout)\fR."
.PP
.B Fputc
behaves like
.BR putc ,
but is a genuine function rather than a macro.
.PP
.B Putw
appends word (that is,
.BR int )
.I w
to the output
.IR stream .
It returns the word written.
.B Putw
neither assumes nor causes special alignment in the file.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR fopen (3),
.BR fclose (3),
.BR getc (3),
.BR puts (3),
.BR printf (3),
.BR fread (3).
.SH DIAGNOSTICS
These functions return the constant
.SM
.B EOF
upon error. Since this is a good integer,
.BR ferror (3)
should be used to detect
.B putw
errors.
.SH BUGS
Because it is implemented as a macro,
.B putc
treats a
.I stream
argument with side effects improperly. In particular
`putc(c,\ *f++);'
doesn't work sensibly.
.PP
Errors can occur long after the call to
.BR putc .

43
man/man3/puts.3
View file

@ -1,43 +0,0 @@
.\" @(#)puts.3s 6.1 (Berkeley) 5/15/85
.\"
.TH PUTS 3 "May 15, 1985"
.AT 3
.SH NAME
puts, fputs \- put a string on a stream
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <stdio.h>
int puts(char *\fIs\fP)
int fputs(char *\fIs\fP, FILE *\fIstream\fP)
.ft P
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
.B Puts
copies the null-terminated string
.I s
to the standard output stream
.B stdout
and appends a
newline character.
.PP
.B Fputs
copies the null-terminated string
.I s
to the named output
.IR stream .
.PP
Neither routine copies the terminal null character.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR fopen (3),
.BR gets (3),
.BR putc (3),
.BR printf (3),
.BR ferror (3),
.BR fread (3).
.SH BUGS
.B Puts
appends a newline,
.B fputs
does not, all in the name of backward compatibility.

36
man/man3/qsort.3
View file

@ -1,36 +0,0 @@
.\" Copyright (c) 1980 Regents of the University of California.
.\" All rights reserved. The Berkeley software License Agreement
.\" specifies the terms and conditions for redistribution.
.\"
.\" @(#)qsort.3 6.1 (Berkeley) 5/15/85
.\"
.TH QSORT 3 "May 15, 1985"
.UC 4
.SH NAME
qsort \- quicker sort
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
.fi
.in +.5i
.ti -.5i
void qsort(void *\fIbase\fP, size_t \fInel\fP, size_t \fIwidth\fP, int (*\fIcompar\fP)(const void *, const void *))
.in -.5i
.ft R
.SH DESCRIPTION
.B Qsort
is an implementation of the quicker-sort algorithm.
The first argument is a pointer to the base of the data;
the second is the number of elements;
the third is the width of an element in bytes;
the last is the name of the comparison routine
to be called with two arguments which are pointers
to the elements being compared.
The routine must return an integer less than, equal to, or greater than 0
according as the first argument is to be considered
less than, equal to, or greater than the second.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR sort (1).

33
man/man3/rand.3
View file

@ -1,33 +0,0 @@
.\" @(#)rand.3c 6.2 (Berkeley) 9/29/85
.\"
.TH RAND 3 "September 29, 1985"
.AT 3
.SH NAME
rand, srand \- random number generator
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <stdlib.h>
void srand(unsigned \fIseed\fP)
unsigned rand(void)
.ft R
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
.B Rand
uses a multiplicative congruential
random number generator with period
.if t 2\u\s732\s0\d
.if n 2**32
to return successive pseudo-random
numbers in the range from 0 to
.BR RAND_MAX .
.PP
The generator is reinitialized by calling
.B srand
with 1 as argument.
It can be set to a random starting point by calling
.B srand
with whatever you like as argument.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR random (3).

131
man/man3/random.3
View file

@ -1,131 +0,0 @@
.\" Copyright (c) 1983 Regents of the University of California.
.\" All rights reserved. The Berkeley software License Agreement
.\" specifies the terms and conditions for redistribution.
.\"
.\" @(#)random.3 6.2 (Berkeley) 9/29/85
.\"
.TH RANDOM 3 "September 29, 1985"
.UC 5
.SH NAME
random, srandom, initstate, setstate \- better random number generator; routines for changing generators
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <stdlib.h>
long random(void)
void srandom(unsigned \fIseed\fP)
char *initstate(unsigned \fIseed\fP, char *\fIstate\fP, int \fIn\fP)
char *setstate(char *\fIstate\fP)
.ft R
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
.PP
.B Random
uses a non-linear additive feedback random number generator employing a
default table of size 31 long integers to return successive pseudo-random
numbers in the range from 0 to
.if t 2\u\s731\s10\d\(mi1.
.if n (2**31)\(mi1.
The period of this random number generator is very large, approximately
.if t 16\(mu(2\u\s731\s10\d\(mi1).
.if n 16*((2**31)\(mi1).
.PP
.B Random/srandom
have (almost) the same calling sequence and initialization properties as
.B rand/srand.
The difference is that
.BR rand (3)
produces a much less random sequence \(em in fact, the low dozen bits
generated by rand go through a cyclic pattern. All the bits generated by
.B random
are usable. For example, ``random()&01'' will produce a random binary
value.
.PP
Unlike
.BR srand ,
.B srandom
does not return the old seed; the reason for this is that the amount of
state information used is much more than a single word. (Two other
routines are provided to deal with restarting/changing random
number generators). Like
.BR rand (3),
however,
.B random
will by default produce a sequence of numbers that can be duplicated
by calling
.B srandom
with
.B 1
as the seed.
.PP
The
.B initstate
routine allows a state array, passed in as an argument, to be initialized
for future use. The size of the state array (in bytes) is used by
.B initstate
to decide how sophisticated a random number generator it should use -- the
more state, the better the random numbers will be.
(Current "optimal" values for the amount of state information are
8, 32, 64, 128, and 256 bytes; other amounts will be rounded down to
the nearest known amount. Using less than 8 bytes will cause an error).
The seed for the initialization (which specifies a starting point for
the random number sequence, and provides for restarting at the same
point) is also an argument.
.B Initstate
returns a pointer to the previous state information array.
.PP
Once a state has been initialized, the
.B setstate
routine provides for rapid switching between states.
.B Setstate
returns a pointer to the previous state array; its
argument state array is used for further random number generation
until the next call to
.B initstate
or
.BR setstate .
.PP
Once a state array has been initialized, it may be restarted at a
different point either by calling
.B initstate
(with the desired seed, the state array, and its size) or by calling
both
.B setstate
(with the state array) and
.B srandom
(with the desired seed).
The advantage of calling both
.B setstate
and
.B srandom
is that the size of the state array does not have to be remembered after
it is initialized.
.PP
With 256 bytes of state information, the period of the random number
generator is greater than
.if t 2\u\s769\s10\d,
.if n 2**69
which should be sufficient for most purposes.
.SH AUTHOR
Earl T. Cohen
.SH DIAGNOSTICS
.PP
If
.B initstate
is called with less than 8 bytes of state information, or if
.B setstate
detects that the state information has been garbled, error
messages are printed on the standard error output.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR rand (3).
.SH NOTES
.B initstate
and
.B setstate
are not declared in
.IR <stdlib.h> ,
programmers must provide their own declarations.
.SH BUGS
About 2/3 the speed of
.BR rand (3).

141
man/man3/rcmd.3
View file

@ -1,141 +0,0 @@
.\" Copyright (c) 1983 Regents of the University of California.
.\" All rights reserved. The Berkeley software License Agreement
.\" specifies the terms and conditions for redistribution.
.\"
.\" @(#)rcmd.3 6.7 (Berkeley) 5/14/86
.\"
.TH RCMD 3 "May 14, 1986"
.UC 5
.SH NAME
rcmd, rresvport, ruserok \- routines for returning a stream to a remote command
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.B "#include <sys/types.h>"
.B "#include <net/netlib.h>"
.PP
.B "rem = rcmd(ahost, inport, locuser, remuser, cmd, fd2p);"
.B char **ahost;
.B int inport;
.B "char *locuser, *remuser, *cmd;"
.B int *fd2p;
.PP
.B s = rresvport(port);
.B int *port;
.PP
.B "ruserok(rhost, superuser, ruser, luser);"
.B char *rhost;
.B int superuser;
.B char *ruser, *luser;
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
.I Rcmd
is a routine used by the super-user to execute a command on
a remote machine using an authentication scheme based
on reserved port numbers.
.I Rresvport
is a routine which returns a descriptor to a socket
with an address in the privileged port space.
.I Ruserok
is a routine used by servers
to authenticate clients requesting service with
.IR rcmd .
All three functions are present in the same file and are used
by the
.IR rshd (8)
server (among others).
.PP
.I Rcmd
looks up the host
.I *ahost
using
.IR gethostbyname (3),
returning \-1 if the host does not exist.
Otherwise
.I *ahost
is set to the standard name of the host
and a connection is established to a server
residing at the well-known Internet port
.IR inport .
.PP
If the connection succeeds,
a socket in the Internet domain of type SOCK_STREAM
is returned to the caller, and given to the remote
command as
.B stdin
and
.BR stdout .
If
.I fd2p
is non-zero, then an auxiliary channel to a control
process will be set up, and a descriptor for it will be placed
in
.IR *fd2p .
The control process will return diagnostic
output from the command (unit 2) on this channel, and will also
accept bytes on this channel as being UNIX signal numbers, to be
forwarded to the process group of the command.
If
.I fd2p
is 0, then the
.B stderr
(unit 2 of the remote
command) will be made the same as the
.B stdout
and no
provision is made for sending arbitrary signals to the remote process,
although you may be able to get its attention by using out-of-band data.
.PP
The protocol is described in detail in
.IR rshd (8).
.PP
The
.I rresvport
routine is used to obtain a socket with a privileged
address bound to it. This socket is suitable for use
by
.I rcmd
and several other routines. Privileged Internet ports are those
in the range 0 to 1023. Only the super-user
is allowed to bind an address of this sort to a socket.
.PP
.I Ruserok
takes a remote host's name, as returned by a
.IR gethostbyaddr (3)
routine, two user names and a flag indicating whether
the local user's name is that of the super-user. It then
checks the files
.I /etc/hosts.equiv
and, possibly,
.I .rhosts
in the current working directory (normally the local
user's home directory) to see if the request for
service is allowed. A 0 is returned if the machine
name is listed in the ``hosts.equiv'' file, or the
host and remote user name are found in the ``.rhosts''
file; otherwise
.I ruserok
returns \-1. If the
.I superuser
flag is 1, the checking of the ``host.equiv'' file is
bypassed.
If the local domain (as obtained from \fIgethostname\fP\|(3))
is the same as the remote domain, only the machine name need be specified.
.SH SEE ALSO
rlogin(1),
rsh(1),
intro(2),
rexec(3),
rexecd(8),
rlogind(8),
rshd(8)
.SH DIAGNOSTICS
.I Rcmd
returns a valid socket descriptor on success.
It returns -1 on error and prints a diagnostic message on the standard error.
.PP
.I Rresvport
returns a valid, bound socket descriptor on success.
It returns -1 on error with the global value
.I errno
set according to the reason for failure.
The error code EAGAIN is overloaded to mean ``All network ports in use.''

28
man/man3/readv.3
View file

@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
.TH READV 3 "January 6, 2010"
.UC 4
.SH NAME
readv, writev \- vector-based IO
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <sys/uio.h>
ssize_t readv(int \fIfildes\fP, const struct iovec *\fIiov\fP, int \fIiovcnt\fP);
ssize_t writev(int \fIfildes\fP, const struct iovec *\fIiov\fP, int \fIiovcnt\fP);
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
The \fBreadv\fP and \fBwritev\fP functions allow one to use multiple buffers
when reading from or writing to files. The \fIfildes\fP parameter specifies the
file descriptor as with the \fBread\fP and \fBwrite\fP functions. \fIiov\fP
specifies an array of buffers to be read into or written from. For each element
of this array, the iov_base member specifies the address of the buffer and
iov_len specifies its size in bytes. The number of buffers is specified by
\fIiovcnt\fP. At most IOV_MAX buffers may be specified and their total size may
not exceed SSIZE_MAX (both constants are defined in limits.h).
.SH "RETURN VALUE"
In case of success, the total number of bytes read or written is returned.
Zero may be returned if no buffers were specified or each buffer has size zero.
In the case of writev, a return value zero may also indicate an end of file
condition. If the functions fail, -1 is returned.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
read(2), write(2)

20
man/man3/realpath.3
View file

@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
.TH REALPATH 3 "December 3, 2009"
.UC 4
.SH NAME
realpath \- resolve a pathname
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <stdlib.h>
char *realpath(const char *\fIfile_name\fP, char *\fIresolved_name\fP);
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
realpath finds an absolute path to \fIfile_name\fP which does not
contain . and .. components or symbolic links. The absolute path is stored
in \fIresolved_name\fP, which is expected to provide storage for at least
MAX_PATH bytes.
.SH "RETURN VALUE
If the function succeeds, a pointer to \fIresolved_name\fP is returned.
If the function fails, NULL is returned and errno is set to indicate the
cause of the failure.

541
man/man3/regex.3
View file

@ -1,541 +0,0 @@
.\" Copyright (c) 1992, 1993, 1994 Henry Spencer.
.\" Copyright (c) 1992, 1993, 1994
.\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
.\"
.\" This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
.\" Henry Spencer.
.\"
.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
.\" are met:
.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
.\" must display the following acknowledgement:
.\" This product includes software developed by the University of
.\" California, Berkeley and its contributors.
.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
.\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
.\" without specific prior written permission.
.\"
.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
.\"
.\" @(#)regex.3 8.4 (Berkeley) 3/20/94
.\"
.TH REGEX 3 "March 20, 1994"
.de ZR
.\" one other place knows this name: the SEE ALSO section
.BR re_format (7) \\$1
..
.SH NAME
regex, regcomp, regexec, regerror, regfree \- regular-expression library
.SH SYNOPSIS
.ft B
.\".na
#include <sys/types.h>
.br
#include <regex.h>
.sp
.in +.5i
.ti -.5i
int regcomp(regex_t *\fIpreg\fP, const char *\fIpattern\fP, int \fIcflags\fP);
.ti -.5i
int regexec(const regex_t *\fIpreg\fP, const char *\fIstring\fP,
size_t \fInmatch\fP, regmatch_t \fIpmatch\fP[], int \fIeflags\fP);
.ti -.5i
size_t regerror(int \fIerrcode\fP, const regex_t *\fIpreg\fP,
char *\fIerrbuf\fP, size_t \fIerrbuf_size\fP);
.ti -.5i
void regfree(regex_t *\fIpreg\fP);
.in -.5i
.ft R
.SH DESCRIPTION
These routines implement POSIX 1003.2 regular expressions (``RE''s);
see
.ZR .
.B Regcomp
compiles an RE written as a string into an internal form,
.B regexec
matches that internal form against a string and reports results,
.B regerror
transforms error codes from either into human-readable messages,
and
.B regfree
frees any dynamically-allocated storage used by the internal form
of an RE.
.PP
The header
.I <regex.h>
declares two structure types,
.B regex_t
and
.BR regmatch_t ,
the former for compiled internal forms and the latter for match reporting.
It also declares the four functions,
a type
.BR regoff_t ,
and a number of constants with names starting with ``REG_''.
.PP
.B Regcomp
compiles the regular expression contained in the
.I pattern
string,
subject to the flags in
.IR cflags ,
and places the results in the
.B regex_t
structure pointed to by
.IR preg .
.I Cflags
is the bitwise OR of zero or more of the following flags:
.IP REG_EXTENDED \w'REG_EXTENDED'u+2n
Compile modern (``extended'') REs,
rather than the obsolete (``basic'') REs that
are the default.
.IP REG_BASIC
This is a synonym for 0,
provided as a counterpart to REG_EXTENDED to improve readability.
.IP REG_NOSPEC
Compile with recognition of all special characters turned off.
All characters are thus considered ordinary,
so the ``RE'' is a literal string.
This is an extension,
compatible with but not specified by POSIX 1003.2,
and should be used with
caution in software intended to be portable to other systems.
REG_EXTENDED and REG_NOSPEC may not be used
in the same call to
.IR regcomp .
.IP REG_ICASE
Compile for matching that ignores upper/lower case distinctions.
See
.ZR .
.IP REG_NOSUB
Compile for matching that need only report success or failure,
not what was matched.
.IP REG_NEWLINE
Compile for newline-sensitive matching.
By default, newline is a completely ordinary character with no special
meaning in either REs or strings.
With this flag,
`[^' bracket expressions and `.' never match newline,
a `^' anchor matches the null string after any newline in the string
in addition to its normal function,
and the `$' anchor matches the null string before any newline in the
string in addition to its normal function.
.IP REG_PEND
The regular expression ends,
not at the first NUL,
but just before the character pointed to by the
.B re_endp
member of the structure pointed to by
.IR preg .
The
.B re_endp
member is of type
.BR "const\ char\ *" .
This flag permits inclusion of NULs in the RE;
they are considered ordinary characters.
This is an extension,
compatible with but not specified by POSIX 1003.2,
and should be used with
caution in software intended to be portable to other systems.
.PP
When successful,
.B regcomp
returns 0 and fills in the structure pointed to by
.IR preg .
One member of that structure
(other than
.BR re_endp )
is publicized:
.BR re_nsub ,
of type
.BR size_t ,
contains the number of parenthesized subexpressions within the RE
(except that the value of this member is undefined if the
REG_NOSUB flag was used).
If
.B regcomp
fails, it returns a non-zero error code;
see DIAGNOSTICS.
.PP
.B Regexec
matches the compiled RE pointed to by
.I preg
against the
.IR string ,
subject to the flags in
.IR eflags ,
and reports results using
.IR nmatch ,
.IR pmatch ,
and the returned value.
The RE must have been compiled by a previous invocation of
.BR regcomp .
The compiled form is not altered during execution of
.BR regexec ,
so a single compiled RE can be used simultaneously by multiple threads.
.PP
By default,
the NUL-terminated string pointed to by
.I string
is considered to be the text of an entire line, minus any terminating
newline.
The
.I eflags
argument is the bitwise OR of zero or more of the following flags:
.IP REG_NOTBOL \w'REG_STARTEND'u+2n
The first character of
the string
is not the beginning of a line, so the `^' anchor should not match before it.
This does not affect the behavior of newlines under REG_NEWLINE.
.IP REG_NOTEOL
The NUL terminating
the string
does not end a line, so the `$' anchor should not match before it.
This does not affect the behavior of newlines under REG_NEWLINE.
.IP REG_STARTEND
The string is considered to start at
\fIstring\fR\ + \fIpmatch\fR[0].\fBrm_so\fR
and to have a terminating NUL located at
\fIstring\fR\ + \fIpmatch\fR[0].\fBrm_eo\fR
(there need not actually be a NUL at that location),
regardless of the value of
.IR nmatch .
See below for the definition of
.IR pmatch
and
.IR nmatch .
This is an extension,
compatible with but not specified by POSIX 1003.2,
and should be used with
caution in software intended to be portable to other systems.
Note that a non-zero \fBrm_so\fR does not imply REG_NOTBOL;
REG_STARTEND affects only the location of the string,
not how it is matched.
.PP
See
.ZR
for a discussion of what is matched in situations where an RE or a
portion thereof could match any of several substrings of
.IR string .
.PP
Normally,
.B regexec
returns 0 for success and the non-zero code REG_NOMATCH for failure.
Other non-zero error codes may be returned in exceptional situations;
see DIAGNOSTICS.
.PP
If REG_NOSUB was specified in the compilation of the RE,
or if
.I nmatch
is 0,
.B regexec
ignores the
.I pmatch
argument (but see below for the case where REG_STARTEND is specified).
Otherwise,
.I pmatch
points to an array of
.I nmatch
structures of type
.BR regmatch_t .
Such a structure has at least the members
.B rm_so
and
.BR rm_eo ,
both of type
.B regoff_t
(a signed arithmetic type at least as large as an
.B off_t
and a
.BR ssize_t ),
containing respectively the offset of the first character of a substring
and the offset of the first character after the end of the substring.
Offsets are measured from the beginning of the
.I string
argument given to
.BR regexec .
An empty substring is denoted by equal offsets,
both indicating the character following the empty substring.
.PP
The 0th member of the
.I pmatch
array is filled in to indicate what substring of
.I string
was matched by the entire RE.
Remaining members report what substring was matched by parenthesized
subexpressions within the RE;
member
.I i
reports subexpression
.IR i ,
with subexpressions counted (starting at 1) by the order of their opening
parentheses in the RE, left to right.
Unused entries in the array\(emcorresponding either to subexpressions that
did not participate in the match at all, or to subexpressions that do not
exist in the RE (that is, \fIi\fR\ > \fIpreg\fR\->\fBre_nsub\fR)\(emhave both
.B rm_so
and
.B rm_eo
set to \-1.
If a subexpression participated in the match several times,
the reported substring is the last one it matched.
(Note, as an example in particular, that when the RE `(b*)+' matches `bbb',
the parenthesized subexpression matches each of the three `b's and then
an infinite number of empty strings following the last `b',
so the reported substring is one of the empties.)
.PP
If REG_STARTEND is specified,
.I pmatch
must point to at least one
.B regmatch_t
(even if
.I nmatch
is 0 or REG_NOSUB was specified),
to hold the input offsets for REG_STARTEND.
Use for output is still entirely controlled by
.IR nmatch ;
if
.I nmatch
is 0 or REG_NOSUB was specified,
the value of
.IR pmatch [0]
will not be changed by a successful
.BR regexec .
.PP
.B Regerror
maps a non-zero
.I errcode
from either
.B regcomp
or
.B regexec
to a human-readable, printable message.
If
.I preg
is non-NULL,
the error code should have arisen from use of
the
.B regex_t
pointed to by
.IR preg ,
and if the error code came from
.BR regcomp ,
it should have been the result from the most recent
.B regcomp
using that
.BR regex_t .
.RI ( Regerror
may be able to supply a more detailed message using information
from the
.BR regex_t .)
.B Regerror
places the NUL-terminated message into the buffer pointed to by
.IR errbuf ,
limiting the length (including the NUL) to at most
.I errbuf_size
bytes.
If the whole message won't fit,
as much of it as will fit before the terminating NUL is supplied.
In any case,
the returned value is the size of buffer needed to hold the whole
message (including terminating NUL).
If
.I errbuf_size
is 0,
.I errbuf
is ignored but the return value is still correct.
.PP
If the
.I errcode
given to
.B regerror
is first ORed with REG_ITOA,
the ``message'' that results is the printable name of the error code,
e.g. ``REG_NOMATCH'',
rather than an explanation thereof.
If
.I errcode
is REG_ATOI,
then
.I preg
shall be non-NULL and the
.B re_endp
member of the structure it points to
must point to the printable name of an error code;
in this case, the result in
.I errbuf
is the decimal digits of
the numeric value of the error code
(0 if the name is not recognized).
REG_ITOA and REG_ATOI are intended primarily as debugging facilities;
they are extensions,
compatible with but not specified by POSIX 1003.2,
and should be used with
caution in software intended to be portable to other systems.
Be warned also that they are considered experimental and changes are possible.
.PP
.B Regfree
frees any dynamically-allocated storage associated with the compiled RE
pointed to by
.IR preg .
The remaining
.B regex_t
is no longer a valid compiled RE
and the effect of supplying it to
.B regexec
or
.B regerror
is undefined.
.PP
None of these functions references global variables except for tables
of constants;
all are safe for use from multiple threads if the arguments are safe.
.SH IMPLEMENTATION CHOICES
There are a number of decisions that 1003.2 leaves up to the implementor,
either by explicitly saying ``undefined'' or by virtue of them being
forbidden by the RE grammar.
This implementation treats them as follows.
.PP
See
.ZR
for a discussion of the definition of case-independent matching.
.PP
There is no particular limit on the length of REs,
except insofar as memory is limited.
Memory usage is approximately linear in RE size, and largely insensitive
to RE complexity, except for bounded repetitions.
See BUGS for one short RE using them
that will run almost any system out of memory.
.PP
A backslashed character other than one specifically given a magic meaning
by 1003.2 (such magic meanings occur only in obsolete [``basic''] REs)
is taken as an ordinary character.
.PP
Any unmatched [ is a REG_EBRACK error.
.PP
Equivalence classes cannot begin or end bracket-expression ranges.
The endpoint of one range cannot begin another.
.PP
RE_DUP_MAX, the limit on repetition counts in bounded repetitions, is 255.
.PP
A repetition operator (?, *, +, or bounds) cannot follow another
repetition operator.
A repetition operator cannot begin an expression or subexpression
or follow `^' or `|'.
.PP
`|' cannot appear first or last in a (sub)expression or after another `|',
i.e. an operand of `|' cannot be an empty subexpression.
An empty parenthesized subexpression, `()', is legal and matches an
empty (sub)string.
An empty string is not a legal RE.
.PP
A `{' followed by a digit is considered the beginning of bounds for a
bounded repetition, which must then follow the syntax for bounds.
A `{' \fInot\fR followed by a digit is considered an ordinary character.
.PP
`^' and `$' beginning and ending subexpressions in obsolete (``basic'')
REs are anchors, not ordinary characters.
.SH SEE ALSO
.BR grep (1),
.BR re_format (7).
.PP
POSIX 1003.2, sections 2.8 (Regular Expression Notation)
and
B.5 (C Binding for Regular Expression Matching).
.SH DIAGNOSTICS
Non-zero error codes from
.B regcomp
and
.B regexec
include the following:
.PP
.nf
.ta \w'REG_ECOLLATE'u+3n
REG_NOMATCH regexec() failed to match
REG_BADPAT invalid regular expression
REG_ECOLLATE invalid collating element
REG_ECTYPE invalid character class
REG_EESCAPE \e applied to unescapable character
REG_ESUBREG invalid backreference number
REG_EBRACK brackets [ ] not balanced
REG_EPAREN parentheses ( ) not balanced
REG_EBRACE braces { } not balanced
REG_BADBR invalid repetition count(s) in { }
REG_ERANGE invalid character range in [ ]
REG_ESPACE ran out of memory
REG_BADRPT ?, *, or + operand invalid
REG_EMPTY empty (sub)expression
REG_ASSERT ``can't happen''\(emyou found a bug
REG_INVARG invalid argument, e.g. negative-length string
.fi
.SH HISTORY
Originally written by Henry Spencer.
Altered for inclusion in the 4.4BSD distribution.
.SH BUGS
This is an alpha release with known defects.
Please report problems.
.PP
There is one known functionality bug.
The implementation of internationalization is incomplete:
the locale is always assumed to be the default one of 1003.2,
and only the collating elements etc. of that locale are available.
.PP
The back-reference code is subtle and doubts linger about its correctness
in complex cases.
.PP
.B Regexec
performance is poor.
This will improve with later releases.
.I Nmatch
exceeding 0 is expensive;
.I nmatch
exceeding 1 is worse.
.B Regexec
is largely insensitive to RE complexity \fIexcept\fR that back
references are massively expensive.
RE length does matter; in particular, there is a strong speed bonus
for keeping RE length under about 30 characters,
with most special characters counting roughly double.
.PP
.B Regcomp
implements bounded repetitions by macro expansion,
which is costly in time and space if counts are large
or bounded repetitions are nested.
An RE like, say,
`((((a{1,100}){1,100}){1,100}){1,100}){1,100}'
will (eventually) run almost any existing machine out of swap space.
.PP
There are suspected problems with response to obscure error conditions.
Notably,
certain kinds of internal overflow,
produced only by truly enormous REs or by multiply nested bounded repetitions,
are probably not handled well.
.PP
Due to a mistake in 1003.2, things like `a)b' are legal REs because `)' is
a special character only in the presence of a previous unmatched `('.
This can't be fixed until the spec is fixed.
.PP
The standard's definition of back references is vague.
For example, does
`a\e(\e(b\e)*\e2\e)*d' match `abbbd'?
Until the standard is clarified,
behavior in such cases should not be relied on.
.PP
The implementation of word-boundary matching is a bit of a kludge,
and bugs may lurk in combinations of word-boundary matching and anchoring.

20
man/man3/remainder.3
View file

@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
.TH REMAINDER 3 "December 18, 2009"
.UC 4
.SH NAME
remainder \- floating point remainder after division
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <math.h>
double remainder(double \fIx\fP, double \fIy\fP);
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
This function returns the remainder of a division of \fIx\fP by \fIy\fP. More
formally, it computes which integer \fIn\fP is closest to the fraction
\fIx\fP/\fIy\fP and returns \fIx\fP - \fIn\fP*\fIy\fP. An even value for
\fIn\fP is preferred over an odd one if both are equally far away (that is,
banker's rounding is applied). If \fIx\fP is infinite or \fIy\fP is zero,
a NaN value is returned.
.SH "RETURN VALUE"
The function returns the remainder of a division of \fIx\fP by \fIy\fP.

280
man/man3/resolver.3
View file

@ -1,280 +0,0 @@
.\" Copyright (c) 1985 The Regents of the University of California.
.\" All rights reserved.
.\"
.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided
.\" that: (1) source distributions retain this entire copyright notice and
.\" comment, and (2) distributions including binaries display the following
.\" acknowledgement: ``This product includes software developed by the
.\" University of California, Berkeley and its contributors'' in the
.\" documentation or other materials provided with the distribution and in
.\" all advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software.
.\" Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may
.\" be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
.\" specific prior written permission.
.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
.\" WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
.\" MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
.\"
.\" @(#)resolver.3 6.5 (Berkeley) 6/23/90
.\"
.TH RESOLVER 3 "June 23, 1990"
.UC 4
.SH NAME
resolver, res_query, res_search, res_mkquery, res_send, res_init, dn_comp, dn_expand \- resolver routines
.SH SYNOPSIS
.B #include <sys/types.h>
.br
.B #include <net/gen/in.h>
.br
.B #include <net/gen/nameser.h>
.br
.B #include <net/gen/resolv.h>
.PP
.B "res_query(dname, class, type, answer, anslen)"
.br
.B char *dname;
.br
.B int class, type;
.br
.B u_char *answer;
.br
.B int anslen;
.PP
.B "res_search(dname, class, type, answer, anslen)"
.br
.B char *dname;
.br
.B int class, type;
.br
.B u_char *answer;
.br
.B int anslen;
.PP
.B "res_mkquery(op, dname, class, type, data, datalen, newrr, buf, buflen)"
.br
.B int op;
.br
.B char *dname;
.br
.B int class, type;
.br
.B char *data;
.br
.B int datalen;
.br
.B struct rrec *newrr;
.br
.B char *buf;
.br
.B int buflen;
.PP
.B res_send(msg, msglen, answer, anslen)
.br
.B char *msg;
.br
.B int msglen;
.br
.B char *answer;
.br
.B int anslen;
.PP
.B res_init()
.PP
.B dn_comp(exp_dn, comp_dn, length, dnptrs, lastdnptr)
.br
.B char *exp_dn, *comp_dn;
.br
.B int length;
.br
.B char **dnptrs, **lastdnptr;
.PP
.B dn_expand(msg, eomorig, comp_dn, exp_dn, length)
.br
.B char *msg, *eomorig, *comp_dn, exp_dn;
.br
.B int length;
.SH DESCRIPTION
These routines are used for making, sending and interpreting
query and reply messages with Internet domain name servers.
.PP
Global configuration and state information that is used by the
resolver routines is kept in the structure
.IR _res .
Most of the values have reasonable defaults and can be ignored.
Options
stored in
.I _res.options
are defined in
.I resolv.h
and are as follows.
Options are stored as a simple bit mask containing the bitwise ``or''
of the options enabled.
.IP RES_INIT
True if the initial name server address and default domain name are
initialized (i.e.,
.I res_init
has been called).
.IP RES_DEBUG
Print debugging messages.
.IP RES_AAONLY
Accept authoritative answers only.
With this option,
.I res_send
should continue until it finds an authoritative answer or finds an error.
Currently this is not implemented.
.IP RES_USEVC
Use TCP connections for queries instead of UDP datagrams.
.IP RES_STAYOPEN
Used with RES_USEVC to keep the TCP connection open between
queries.
This is useful only in programs that regularly do many queries.
UDP should be the normal mode used.
.IP RES_IGNTC
Unused currently (ignore truncation errors, i.e., don't retry with TCP).
.IP RES_RECURSE
Set the recursion-desired bit in queries.
This is the default.
(\c
.I res_send
does not do iterative queries and expects the name server
to handle recursion.)
.IP RES_DEFNAMES
If set,
.I res_search
will append the default domain name to single-component names
(those that do not contain a dot).
This option is enabled by default.
.IP RES_DNSRCH
If this option is set,
.I res_search
will search for host names in the current domain and in parent domains; see
.IR hostname (7).
This is used by the standard host lookup routine
.IR gethostbyname (3).
This option is enabled by default.
.PP
The
.I res_init
routine
reads the configuration file (if any; see
.IR resolver (5))
to get the default domain name,
search list and
the Internet address of the local name server(s).
If no server is configured, the host running
the resolver is tried.
The current domain name is defined by the hostname
if not specified in the configuration file;
it can be overridden by the environment variable LOCALDOMAIN.
Initialization normally occurs on the first call
to one of the following routines.
.PP
The
.I res_query
function provides an interface to the server query mechanism.
It constructs a query, sends it to the local server,
awaits a response, and makes preliminary checks on the reply.
The query requests information of the specified
.I type
and
.I class
for the specified fully-qualified domain name
.I dname .
The reply message is left in the
.I answer
buffer with length
.I anslen
supplied by the caller.
.PP
The
.I res_search
routine makes a query and awaits a response like
.IR res_query ,
but in addition, it implements the default and search rules
controlled by the RES_DEFNAMES and RES_DNSRCH options.
It returns the first successful reply.
.PP
The remaining routines are lower-level routines used by
.IR res_query .
The
.I res_mkquery
function
constructs a standard query message and places it in
.IR buf .
It returns the size of the query, or \-1 if the query is
larger than
.IR buflen .
The query type
.I op
is usually QUERY, but can be any of the query types defined in
.IR <arpa/nameser.h> .
The domain name for the query is given by
.IR dname .
.I Newrr
is currently unused but is intended for making update messages.
.PP
The
.I res_send
routine
sends a pre-formatted query and returns an answer.
It will call
.I res_init
if RES_INIT is not set, send the query to the local name server, and
handle timeouts and retries.
The length of the reply message is returned, or
\-1 if there were errors.
.PP
The
.I dn_comp
function
compresses the domain name
.I exp_dn
and stores it in
.IR comp_dn .
The size of the compressed name is returned or \-1 if there were errors.
The size of the array pointed to by
.I comp_dn
is given by
.IR length .
The compression uses
an array of pointers
.I dnptrs
to previously-compressed names in the current message.
The first pointer points to
to the beginning of the message and the list ends with NULL.
The limit to the array is specified by
.IR lastdnptr .
A side effect of
.I dn_comp
is to update the list of pointers for
labels inserted into the message
as the name is compressed.
If
.I dnptr
is NULL, names are not compressed.
If
.I lastdnptr
is NULL, the list of labels is not updated.
.PP
The
.I dn_expand
entry
expands the compressed domain name
.I comp_dn
to a full domain name
The compressed name is contained in a query or reply message;
.I msg
is a pointer to the beginning of the message.
The uncompressed name is placed in the buffer indicated by
.I exp_dn
which is of size
.IR length .
The size of compressed name is returned or \-1 if there was an error.
.SH FILES
/etc/resolv.conf see resolver(5)
.SH "SEE ALSO"
gethostbyname(3), named(8), resolver(5), hostname(7),
.br
RFC1032, RFC1033, RFC1034, RFC1035, RFC974,
.br
SMM:11 Name Server Operations Guide for BIND

251
man/man3/scanf.3
View file

@ -1,251 +0,0 @@
.\" @(#)scanf.3s 6.1 (Berkeley) 5/15/85
.\"
.TH SCANF 3 "May 15, 1985"
.AT 3
.SH NAME
scanf, fscanf, sscanf, vscanf, vfscanf, vsscanf \- formatted input conversion
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdarg.h>
int scanf(const char *\fIformat\fP \fR[\fP, \fIpointer\fP\fR] ...\fP)
int fscanf(FILE *\fIstream\fP, const char *\fIformat\fP \fR[\fP, \fIpointer\fP\fR] ...\fP)
int sscanf(const char *\fIs\fP, const char *\fIformat\fP \fR[\fP, \fIpointer\fP\fR] ...\fP)
int vscanf(const char *\fIformat\fP, va_list \fIargs\fP)
int vfscanf(FILE *\fIstream\fP, const char *\fIformat\fP, va_list \fIargs\fP)
int vsscanf(const char *\fIs\fP, const char *\fIformat\fP, va_list \fIargs\fP)
.SH DESCRIPTION
.B Scanf
reads from the standard input stream
.BR stdin .
.B Fscanf
reads from the named input
.IR stream .
.B Sscanf
reads from the character string
.IR s .
Each function reads characters, interprets
them according to a format, and stores the results in its arguments.
Each expects as arguments
a control string
.IR format ,
described below,
and a set of
.I pointer
arguments
indicating where the converted input should be stored.
.PP
The
.B v*scanf
functions can be used to make functions like the first three by using the
.BR stdarg (3)
method to process the argument pointers.
.PP
The
control string
usually contains
conversion specifications, which are used to direct interpretation
of input sequences.
The control string may contain:
.TP 4
1.
Blanks, tabs or newlines,
which match optional white space in the input.
.TP 4
2.
An ordinary character (not %) which must match
the next character of the input stream.
.TP 4
3.
Conversion specifications, consisting of the
character
.BR % ,
an optional assignment suppressing character
.BR * ,
an optional numerical maximum field width, and a conversion
character.
.PP
A conversion specification directs the conversion of the
next input field; the result
is placed in the variable pointed to by the corresponding argument,
unless assignment suppression was
indicated by
.BR * .
An input field is defined as a string of non-space characters;
it extends to the next inappropriate character or until the field
width, if specified, is exhausted.
.PP
The conversion character indicates the interpretation of the
input field; the corresponding pointer argument must
usually be of a restricted type.
The following conversion characters are legal:
.TP 4
.B %
a single `%' is expected
in the input at this point;
no assignment is done.
.TP 4
.B d
a decimal integer is expected;
the corresponding argument should be an integer pointer.
.TP 4
.B o
an octal integer is expected;
the corresponding argument should be a integer pointer.
.TP 4
.B x
a hexadecimal integer is expected;
the corresponding argument should be an integer pointer.
.ti -0.2i
.TP 4
.B s
a character string is expected;
the corresponding argument should be a character pointer
pointing to an array of characters large enough to accept the
string and a terminating `\e0', which will be added.
The input field is terminated by a space character
or a newline.
.TP 4
.B c
a character is expected; the
corresponding argument should be a character pointer.
The normal skip over space characters is suppressed
in this case;
to read the next non-space character, try
`%1s'.
If a field width is given, the corresponding argument
should refer to a character array, and the
indicated number of characters is read.
.TP 4
.B efg
a floating point number is expected;
the next field is converted accordingly and stored through the
corresponding argument, which should be a pointer to a
.BR float .
The input format for
floating point numbers is
an optionally signed
string of digits
possibly containing a decimal point, followed by an optional
exponent field consisting of an E or e followed by an optionally signed integer.
.TP 4
.B [
indicates a string not to be delimited by space characters.
The left bracket is followed by a set of characters and a right
bracket; the characters between the brackets define a set
of characters making up the string.
If the first character
is not circumflex (\|^\|), the input field
is all characters until the first character not in the set between
the brackets; if the first character
after the left bracket is ^, the input field is all characters
until the first character which is in the remaining set of characters
between the brackets.
The corresponding argument must point to a character array.
.PP
The conversion characters
.BR d ,
.B o
and
.B x
may be capitalized or preceded by
.B l
to indicate that a pointer to
.B long
rather than to
.B int
is in the argument list.
Similarly, the conversion characters
.BR e ,
.B f
or
.B g
may be capitalized or
preceded by
.B l
to indicate a pointer to
.B double
rather than to
.BR float .
The conversion characters
.BR d ,
.B o
and
.B x
may be preceded by
.B h
to indicate a pointer to
.B short
rather than to
.BR int .
.PP
The
.B scanf
functions return the number of successfully matched and assigned input
items.
This can be used to decide how many input items were found.
The constant
.SM
.B EOF
is returned upon end of input; note that this is different
from 0, which means that no conversion was done;
if conversion was intended, it was frustrated by an
inappropriate character in the input.
.PP
For example, the call
.IP "\&" 10
int i; float x; char name[50];
.br
scanf("%d%f%s", &i, &x, name);
.PP
with the input line
.IP
25 54.32E\(mi1 thompson
.PP
will assign to
.B i
the value
25,
.B x
the value 5.432, and
.B name
will contain `\fBthompson\e0\fP' .
Or,
.IP
int i; float x; char name[50];
.br
scanf("%2d%f%*d%[1234567890]", &i, &x, name);
.PP
with input
.IP
56789 0123 56a72
.PP
will assign 56 to
.BR i ,
789.0 to
.BR x ,
skip `0123',
and place the string `56\e0' in
.BR name .
The next call to
.B getchar
will return `a'.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR atof (3),
.BR getc (3),
.BR printf (3),
.BR stdarg (3).
.SH DIAGNOSTICS
The
.B scanf
functions return
.SM
.B EOF
on end of input,
and a short count for missing or illegal data items.
.SH BUGS
The success of literal matches and suppressed
assignments is not directly
determinable.

120
man/man3/servxcheck.3
View file

@ -1,120 +0,0 @@
.TH SERVXCHECK 3
.SH NAME
servxcheck \- Internet service access check
.SH SYNOPSIS
.ft B
.nf
#define _MINIX_SOURCE 1
#include </net/gen/netdb.h>
int servxcheck(ipaddr_t \fIpeer\fP, const char *\fIservice\fP,
void (*\fIlogf\fP)(int \fIpass\fP, const char *\fIname\fP));
char *servxfile(const char *\fIfile\fP);
.fi
.ft R
.SH DESCRIPTION
.B Servxcheck()
is used by programs like
.B inetd
to perform an access check on the host connected to the other end of the TCP
channel that has IP address
.IR peer .
.PP
.B Servxcheck()
translates the IP address to the
associated host name if necessary, and checks if the host is granted access
as guided by the file
.BR /etc/serv.access .
(See
.BR serv.access (5).)
The service name used to search the access file is passed by the caller as
.IR service .
These names should be the same as the service names in
.BR /etc/services .
.PP
The caller should use the NWIOGTCPCONF ioctl() call to find out what the
IP address of the remote end is. It is wise to bypass the
.B servxcheck()
call if the remote end happens to be the local machine (remaddr == locaddr),
so that local connections aren't impeded by slow checks.
.B Servxcheck()
will itself allow connections from 127.0.0.1/8 immediately, so you
don't have to check for that. Example of use:
.PP
.RS
.nf
.ta +4n +4n +4n
if (ioctl(fd, NWIOGTCPCONF, &tcpconf) < 0
|| tcpconf.nwtc_remaddr == tcpconf.nwtc_locaddr
|| servxcheck(tcpconf.nwtc_remaddr, service_name, NULL)
) {
serve();
}
.fi
.RE
.PP
An attempt to connect to a service is logged if the access is denied. You
can use the special checkword "\fBlog\fP" to also log if access is granted.
Logging will be done with
.B syslog()
at the
.B warning
level.
A syntax error in the access file may be logged under the
.B err
level.
The caller must use
.B openlog()
to set the appropriate logging facility. One may do one's own logging by
supplying a
.I logf
function that will be called by
.B servxcheck
with a first argument that is true if access is granted, false if
denied, and a second argument that is the name of the remote host whose
access has been checked.
.PP
The default is to fail the check unless the access file says otherwise.
Strange errors make the check succeed. (We do not want
remote access to fail because of some system error.) Note that this
function is not meant to check access to the system, that's what
passwords and such are for, but only to limit access to those who are
allowed to use the services the system offers.
.PP
Connections from a machine to itself are accepted immediately. No further
checks, no logging.
.PP
.B Servxfile()
may be used to specify a file other than the default
.BR /etc/serv.access .
This is useful for programs started from
.B inetd
that want to handle the access check themselves, using a private access file.
The return value of
.B servxfile()
is the pathname of the old access file. Only a pointer to the new path is
saved, the caller must keep the string it points to intact.
.SH FILES
.TP 25n
.B /etc/serv.access
Default access check file.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR syslog (3),
.BR serv.access (5),
.BR services (5),
.BR inetd (8).
.SH DIAGNOSTICS
.B Servxcheck()
returns 0 if the access is denied, 1 if granted.
.PP
Typical syslog message:
.PP
.RS
Jan 10 20:27:20 flotsam inetd[174]: service 'shell' granted to jetsam.cs.vu.nl
.RE
.SH BUGS
IP and DNS based access checks will stop most crackers, but not the really
determined ones. Luckily MINIX 3 is sufficiently strange to thwart the well
known cracking schemes. But don't ever allow yourself to feel secure.
.SH AUTHOR
Kees J. Bot <kjb@cs.vu.nl>

112
man/man3/setbuf.3
View file

@ -1,112 +0,0 @@
.\" Copyright (c) 1980 Regents of the University of California.
.\" All rights reserved. The Berkeley software License Agreement
.\" specifies the terms and conditions for redistribution.
.\"
.\" @(#)setbuf.3s 6.2 (Berkeley) 5/12/86
.\"
.TH SETBUF 3 "May 12, 1986"
.UC 4
.SH NAME
setbuf, setvbuf \- assign buffering to a stream
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <stdio.h>
int setbuf(FILE *\fIstream\fP, char *\fIbuf\fP)
int setvbuf(FILE *\fIstream\fP, char *\fIbuf\fP, int \fItype\fP, size_t \fIsize\fP)
.SH DESCRIPTION
The three types of buffering available are unbuffered, block buffered,
and line buffered.
When an output stream is unbuffered, information appears on the
destination file or terminal as soon as written;
when it is block buffered many characters are saved up and written as a block;
when it is line buffered characters are saved up until a newline is
encountered or input is read from stdin.
.B Fflush
(see
.BR fclose (3))
may be used to force the block out early.
Normally all files are block buffered.
A buffer is obtained from
.BR malloc (3)
upon the first
.B getc
or
.BR putc (3)
on the file.
If the standard stream
.B stdout
refers to a terminal it is line buffered.
The standard stream
.B stderr
is always unbuffered.
.PP
.B Setbuf
is used after a stream has been opened but before it is read or written.
The character array
.I buf
is used instead of an automatically allocated buffer. If
.I buf
is the constant pointer
.SM
.BR NULL ,
input/output will be completely unbuffered.
A manifest constant
.SM
.B BUFSIZ
tells how big an array is needed:
.IP
.B char
buf[BUFSIZ];
.PP
.BR Setvbuf ,
an alternate form of
.BR setbuf ,
is used after a stream has been opened but before it is read or written.
It has three uses, depending on the value of the
.IR type
argument:
.TP 5
.B "setvbuf(\fIstream\fP, \fIbuf\fP, _IOFBF, \fIsize\fP)"
Causes input/output to be fully buffered using the character array
.I buf
whose size is determined by the
.I size
argument.
If
.I buf
is the constant pointer
.SM
.BR NULL ,
then an automatically allocated buffer will be used.
.TP 5
.B "setvbuf(\fIstream\fP, \fIbuf\fP, _IOLBF, \fIsize\fP)"
Like above, except that output will be line buffered, i.e. the buffer will
be flushed when a newline is written, the buffer is full, or input is
requested.
.TP 5
.B "setvbuf(\fIstream\fP, \fIbuf\fP, _IONBF, \fIsize\fP)"
Causes input/output to be completely unbuffered.
.I Buf
and
.I size
are ignored.
.PP
A file can be changed between unbuffered, line buffered, or block buffered
by using
.B freopen
(see
.BR fopen (3))
followed by the appropriate
.B setvbuf
call.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR fopen (3),
.BR getc (3),
.BR putc (3),
.BR malloc (3),
.BR fclose (3),
.BR puts (3),
.BR printf (3),
.BR fread (3).

69
man/man3/setjmp.3
View file

@ -1,69 +0,0 @@
.TH SETJMP 3 "June 22, 2006"
.UC 4
.SH NAME
setjmp, longjmp, _setjmp, _longjmp, sigsetjmp, siglongjmp \- save and restore execution contexts
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <setjmp.h>
int setjmp(jmp_buf env);
void longjmp(jmp_buf env, int val);
int _setjmp(jmp_buf env);
void _longjmp(jmp_buf env, int val);
#define _POSIX_SOURCE
int sigsetjmp(sigjmp_buf env, int savemask);
void siglongjmp(sigjmp_buf env, int val);
.SH DESCRIPTION
These calls provide a way for a process to save an execution context into a
buffer, and later resume execution from that context, effectively performing
a non-local jump. The
.B setjmp
family of functions store the context into the \fIenv\fP data structure,
and return the value 0. The
.B longjmp
family of functions jump to the context saved in the given \fIenv\fP data
structure, causing the process to continue as if it returned from the
corresponding
.B setjmp
call again, but this time with the non-zero return value in \fIval\fP.
.PP
The difference between the three pairs of setjmp/longjmp functions lies in the
behaviour with respect to saving/restoring the process signal mask. POSIX does
not require the process signal mask to be saved and restored during
.B setjmp
/
.B longjmp
\. However, the current implementation does this in order to agree with OSF/1
and other BSD derived systems.
.PP
The pair of functions
.B _setjmp
/
.B _longjmp
, traditional in BSD systems, may be used when the signal mask is not to be
saved/restored.
.PP
Finally, the POSIX
.B sigsetjmp
/
.B siglongjmp
functions allow the programmer to specify explicitly whether the signal mask
is to be saved/restored, by means of the \fIsavemask\fP parameter. If this
parameter is zero, the signal mask will not be saved/restored, otherwise it
will.
.SH NOTES
After the function calling
.B setjmp
has returned, the saved context may not be used in a call to
.B longjmp
anymore, since the relevant portion of the stack may already have been wiped
out at that point.
.PP
Using these functions to return to a previous state from a signal handler
is possible but should be done with extreme care, as some interrupted library
routines may not be reentrant and/or temporarily allocate resources.
.PP
See the setjmp.h header file for more implementation details specific to Minix.

193
man/man3/sha1.3
View file

@ -1,193 +0,0 @@
.\" $OpenBSD: sha1.3,v 1.37 2008/02/13 08:43:39 art Exp $
.\"
.\" Copyright (c) 1997, 2004 Todd C. Miller <Todd.Miller@courtesan.com>
.\"
.\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
.\" purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
.\" copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
.\"
.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
.\" WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
.\" MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR
.\" ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES
.\" WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN
.\" ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF
.\" OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
.\"
.\" See http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/fips/fips180-1/fip180-1.txt
.\" for the detailed standard
.\"
.Dd $Mdocdate: February 13 2008 $
.Dt SHA1 3
.Os
.Sh NAME
.Nm SHA1Init ,
.Nm SHA1Update ,
.Nm SHA1Final ,
.Nm SHA1Transform ,
.Nm SHA1End ,
.Nm SHA1File ,
.Nm SHA1Data
.Nd calculate the NIST Secure Hash Algorithm
.Sh SYNOPSIS
.Fd #include <sys/types.h>
.Fd #include <minix/sha1.h>
.Ft void
.Fn SHA1Init "SHA1_CTX *context"
.Ft void
.Fn SHA1Update "SHA1_CTX *context" "const u_int8_t *data" "size_t len"
.Ft void
.Fn SHA1Final "u_int8_t digest[SHA1_DIGEST_LENGTH]" "SHA1_CTX *context"
.Ft void
.Fn SHA1Transform "u_int32_t state[5]" "const u_int8_t buffer[SHA1_BLOCK_LENGTH]"
.Ft "char *"
.Fn SHA1End "SHA1_CTX *context" "char *buf"
.Ft "char *"
.Fn SHA1File "const char *filename" "char *buf"
.Ft "char *"
.Fn SHA1Data "const u_int8_t *data" "size_t len" "char *buf"
.Sh DESCRIPTION
The SHA1 functions implement the NIST Secure Hash Algorithm (SHA-1),
FIPS PUB 180-1.
SHA-1 is used to generate a condensed representation
of a message called a message digest.
The algorithm takes a
message less than 2^64 bits as input and produces a 160-bit digest
suitable for use as a digital signature.
.Pp
The SHA1 functions are considered to be more secure than the
.Xr md4 3
and
.Xr md5 3
functions with which they share a similar interface.
.Pp
The
.Fn SHA1Init
function initializes a SHA1_CTX
.Ar context
for use with
.Fn SHA1Update ,
and
.Fn SHA1Final .
The
.Fn SHA1Update
function adds
.Ar data
of length
.Ar len
to the SHA1_CTX specified by
.Ar context .
.Fn SHA1Final
is called when all data has been added via
.Fn SHA1Update
and stores a message digest in the
.Ar digest
parameter.
.Pp
The
.Fn SHA1Transform
function is used by
.Fn SHA1Update
to hash 512-bit blocks and forms the core of the algorithm.
Most programs should use the interface provided by
.Fn SHA1Init ,
.Fn SHA1Update
and
.Fn SHA1Final
instead of calling
.Fn SHA1Transform
directly.
.Pp
The
.Fn SHA1End
function is a front end for
.Fn SHA1Final
which converts the digest into an
.Tn ASCII
representation of the 160 bit digest in hexadecimal.
.Pp
The
.Fn SHA1File
function calculates the digest for a file and returns the result via
.Fn SHA1End .
If
.Fn SHA1File
is unable to open the file a NULL pointer is returned.
.Pp
The
.Fn SHA1Data
function
calculates the digest of an arbitrary string and returns the result via
.Fn SHA1End .
.Pp
For each of the
.Fn SHA1End ,
.Fn SHA1File ,
and
.Fn SHA1Data
functions the
.Ar buf
parameter should either be a string of at least 41 characters in
size or a NULL pointer.
In the latter case, space will be dynamically allocated via
.Xr malloc 3
and should be freed using
.Xr free 3
when it is no longer needed.
.Sh EXAMPLES
The follow code fragment will calculate the digest for
the string "abc" which is ``0xa9993e364706816aba3e25717850c26c9cd0d89d''.
.Bd -literal -offset indent
SHA1_CTX sha;
u_int8_t results[SHA1_DIGEST_LENGTH];
char *buf;
int n;
buf = "abc";
n = strlen(buf);
SHA1Init(&sha);
SHA1Update(&sha, (u_int8_t *)buf, n);
SHA1Final(results, &sha);
/* Print the digest as one long hex value */
printf("0x");
for (n = 0; n < SHA1_DIGEST_LENGTH; n++)
printf("%02x", results[n]);
putchar('\en');
.Ed
.Pp
Alternately, the helper functions could be used in the following way:
.Bd -literal -offset indent
u_int8_t output[SHA1_DIGEST_STRING_LENGTH];
char *buf = "abc";
printf("0x%s\en", SHA1Data(buf, strlen(buf), output));
.Ed
.Sh SEE ALSO
.Xr cksum 1 ,
.Xr sha1 1 ,
.Xr md4 3 ,
.Xr md5 3 ,
.Xr rmd160 3 ,
.Xr sha2 3
.Rs
.%A J. Burrows
.%T The Secure Hash Standard
.%O FIPS PUB 180-1
.Re
.Rs
.%A D. Eastlake and P. Jones
.%T US Secure Hash Algorithm 1
.%O RFC 3174
.Re
.Sh HISTORY
The SHA-1 functions appeared in
.Ox 2.0 .
.Sh CAVEATS
This implementation of SHA-1 has not been validated by NIST
and as such is not in official compliance with the standard.
.Pp
If a message digest is to be copied to a multi-byte type (ie:
an array of five 32-bit integers) it will be necessary to
perform byte swapping on little endian machines such as the i386, alpha,
and vax.

85
man/man3/sigset.3
View file

@ -1,85 +0,0 @@
.TH SIGSET 3
.SH NAME
sigset, sigaddset, sigdelset, sigemptyset, sigfillset, sigismember \- manipulate signal sets
.SH SYNOPSIS
.ft B
#include <signal.h>
.nf
int sigaddset(sigset_t *\fIset\fP, int \fIsig\fP)
int sigdelset(sigset_t *\fIset\fP, int \fIsig\fP)
int sigemptyset(sigset_t *\fIset\fP)
int sigfillset(sigset_t *\fIset\fP)
int sigismember(const sigset_t *\fIset\fP, int \fIsig\fP)
.fi
.ft P
.SH DESCRIPTION
The system calls that handle signals, such as
.BR sigaction (2)
and
.BR sigprocmask (2)
use sets of signals to keep a process from being interrupted by those
signals while executing a signal handler or a critical code segment. These
signal sets are manipulated by the following functions:
.TP 5
.B "int sigaddset(sigset_t *\fIset\fP, int \fIsig\fP)"
Add signal
.I sig
to the signal set referenced by
.IR set .
.TP
.B "int sigdelset(sigset_t *\fIset\fP, int \fIsig\fP)"
Remove signal
.I sig
from the signal set referenced by
.IR set .
.TP
.B "int sigemptyset(sigset_t *\fIset\fP)"
Initialize the signal set referenced by
.I set
to an empty set.
.TP
.B "int sigfillset(sigset_t *\fIset\fP)"
Initialize the signal set referenced by
.I set
to an full set, i.e. all signals are in the set.
.TP
.B "int sigismember(const sigset_t *\fIset\fP, int \fIsig\fP)"
Return
.B 1
if the signal
.I sig
is present in the set referenced by
.IR set ,
.B 0
otherwise.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR sigaction (2),
.BR sigpending (2),
.BR sigprocmask (2),
.BR sigsuspend (2).
.SH DIAGNOSTICS
All functions except
.B sigismember
return
.B 0
on success.
.B Sigismember
returns
.B 0
or
.B 1
on success. They return
.B \-1
with error code
.B EINVAL
for an invalid signal number. (They do not use
.B EFAULT
for a bad
.I set
address, but will simply cause a segmentation violation.)
.SH AUTHOR
Kees J. Bot (kjb@cs.vu.nl)
.\"
.\" $PchId: sigset.3,v 1.2 1996/04/11 06:39:09 philip Exp $

29
man/man3/sleep.3
View file

@ -1,29 +0,0 @@
.\" Copyright (c) 1980 Regents of the University of California.
.\" All rights reserved. The Berkeley software License Agreement
.\" specifies the terms and conditions for redistribution.
.\"
.\" @(#)sleep.3 6.2 (Berkeley) 5/12/86
.\"
.TH SLEEP 3 "August 16, 2009"
.UC 4
.SH NAME
sleep \- suspend execution for interval
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <unistd.h>
unsigned int sleep(unsigned int \fIseconds\fP)
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
The current process is suspended from execution for the number
of seconds specified by the argument.
.PP
The routine is implemented using the 'select' function, so it does not
interfere with alarm timers. If a signal is received, the function returns.
.SH "RETURN VALUE
The amount of time that remains to be slept is returned. This value is
specified in seconds and rounded up.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR pause (2),
.BR nanosleep (3).

123
man/man3/stdarg.3
View file

@ -1,123 +0,0 @@
.\" @(#)varargs.3 6.3 (Berkeley) 5/15/86
.\"
.TH STDARG 3 "May 15, 1986"
.AT 3
.SH NAME
stdarg \- variable argument list
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <stdarg.h>
void va_start(va_list \fIap\fP, \fIargtypeN\fP \fIparmN\fP)
\fItype\fP va_arg(va_list \fIap\fP, \fItype\fP)
void va_end(va_list \fIap\fP)
.ft R
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
This set of macros provides a means of writing portable procedures that
accept variable argument lists.
Routines having variable argument lists (such as
.BR printf (3))
that do not use
.B stdarg
are inherently nonportable, since different
machines use different argument passing conventions.
.PP
A function that accepts a variable argument list is declared with "..." at
the end of its parameter list. It must have at least one normal argument
before the "...". For example:
.PP
.RS
.nf
int printf(const char *format, ...) { /* code */ }
int fprintf(FILE *stream, const char *format, ...) { /* code */ }
.fi
.RE
.PP
.B va_list
is a type which is used for the variable
.I ap
within the body of a variable argument function which is used to traverse
the list.
.PP
.B va_start\c
.RI ( ap ,
.IR parmN )
is called to initialize
.I ap
to the beginning of the list. The last true parameter of the function,
.IR parmN ,
must be supplied to allow
.B va_start
to compute the address of the first variable parameter.
.PP
.B va_arg\c
.RI ( ap ,
.IR type )
will return the next argument in the list pointed to by
.IR ap .
.I Type
is the type to which the expected argument will be converted
when passed as an argument.
.PP
Different types can be mixed, but it is up
to the routine to know what type of argument is
expected, since it cannot be determined at runtime.
.PP
.B va_end\c
.RI ( ap )
must be used to finish up.
.PP
Multiple traversals, each bracketed by
.B va_start
\&...
.B va_end,
are possible.
.SH EXAMPLE
.nf
.ta +4n +4n +4n +4n
\fB#include\fP <stdarg.h>
.sp 0.4
execl(\fBconst char\fP *path, \fB...\fP)
{
\fBva_list\fP ap;
\fBchar\fP *args[100];
\fBint\fP argno = 0;
\fBva_start\fP(ap, path);
\fBwhile\fP ((args[argno++] = \fBva_arg\fP(ap, \fBchar\fP *)) != NULL) {}
\fBva_end\fP(ap);
\fBreturn\fP execv(path, args);
}
.DT
.fi
.SH NOTES
It is up to the calling routine to determine how many arguments
there are, since it is not possible to determine this from the
stack frame. For example,
.B execl
passes a null pointer to signal the end of the list.
.B Printf
can tell how many arguments are supposed to be there by the format.
.PP
The macros
.B va_start
and
.B va_end
may be arbitrarily complex;
for example,
.B va_start
might contain an opening brace,
which is closed by a matching brace in
.BR va_end .
Thus, they should only be used where they could
be placed within a single complex statement.
.SH BUGS
It is impossible to properly show the macros as C declarations as is
done in the synopsis. They can never be coded as C functions, because
all three macros use their arguments by address, and the
.I type
field is certainly impossible.
Just look at them as being part of the C language, like
.BR sizeof .

199
man/man3/stdio.3
View file

@ -1,199 +0,0 @@
.\" Copyright (c) 1980 Regents of the University of California.
.\" All rights reserved. The Berkeley software License Agreement
.\" specifies the terms and conditions for redistribution.
.\"
.\" @(#)stdio.3s 6.2 (Berkeley) 5/13/86
.\"
.TH STDIO 3 "May 13, 1986"
.UC 4
.SH NAME
stdio \- standard buffered input/output package
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <stdio.h>
FILE *stdin;
FILE *stdout;
FILE *stderr;
.ft R
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
The functions in the standard I/O library constitute a user-level buffering
scheme. The in-line macros
.B getc
and
.BR putc (3)
handle characters quickly. The higher level routines
.BR gets ,
.BR fgets ,
.BR scanf ,
.BR fscanf ,
.BR fread ,
.BR puts ,
.BR fputs ,
.BR printf ,
.BR fprintf ,
.BR fwrite
all use
.B getc
and
.BR putc ;
they can be freely intermixed.
.PP
A file with associated buffering is called a
.IR stream ,
and is declared to be a pointer to a defined type
.SM
.BR FILE .
.BR Fopen (3)
creates certain descriptive data for a stream
and returns a pointer to designate the stream in all further transactions.
There are three normally open streams with constant pointers declared in
the include file and associated with the standard open files:
.TP 10n
.B stdin
standard input file
.br
.ns
.TP
.B stdout
standard output file
.br
.ns
.TP
.B stderr
standard error file
.PP
A constant `pointer'
.SM
.B NULL
(0)
designates no stream at all.
.PP
An integer constant
.SM
.B EOF
(\-1) is returned upon end of file or error by integer functions that
deal with streams.
.PP
Any routine that uses the standard input/output package
must include the header file
.RI < stdio.h >
of pertinent macro definitions.
The functions and constants mentioned in the standard I/O manual pages
are declared in the include file and need no further declaration.
The constants, and the following `functions' are
implemented as macros; redeclaration of these names is perilous:
.BR clearerr ,
.BR getc ,
.BR getchar ,
.BR putc ,
.BR putchar ,
.BR feof ,
.BR ferror ,
.BR fileno .
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR open (2),
.BR close (2),
.BR read (2),
.BR write (2),
.BR fclose (3),
.BR ferror (3),
.BR fopen (3),
.BR fread (3),
.BR fseek (3),
.BR getc (3),
.BR gets (3),
.BR printf (3),
.BR putc (3),
.BR puts (3),
.BR scanf (3),
.BR setbuf (3),
.BR ungetc (3).
.SH DIAGNOSTICS
The value
.SM
.B EOF
is returned uniformly to indicate that a
.SM
.B FILE
pointer has not been initialized with
.BR fopen ,
input (output) has been attempted on an output (input) stream, or a
.SM
.B FILE
pointer designates corrupt or otherwise unintelligible
.SM
.B FILE
data.
.PP
For purposes of efficiency, this implementation of the standard library
has been changed to line buffer output to a terminal by default and attempts
to do this transparently by flushing the output whenever a
.BR read (2)
from the standard input is necessary. This is almost always transparent,
but may cause confusion or malfunctioning of programs which use
standard i/o routines but use
.BR read (2)
themselves to read from the standard input.
.PP
In cases where a large amount of computation is done after printing
part of a line on an output terminal, it is necessary to
.BR fflush (3)
the standard output before going off and computing so that the output
will appear.
.SH BUGS
The standard buffered functions do not interact well with certain other
library and system functions, especially \fBfork\fP and \fBabort\fP.
.SH "LIST OF FUNCTIONS"
.sp 2
.nf
.ta \w'setlinebuf'u+2n +\w'setbuf(3)'u+10n
\fBName\fP \fBAppears on Page\fP \fBDescription\fP
.ta \w'setlinebuf'u+4n +\w'setbuf(3)'u+4n
.sp 5p
clearerr ferror(3) stream status inquiries
fclose fclose(3) close or flush a stream
fdopen fopen(3) open a stream
feof ferror(3) stream status inquiries
ferror ferror(3) stream status inquiries
fflush fclose(3) close or flush a stream
fgetc getc(3) get character or word from stream
fgets gets(3) get a string from a stream
fileno ferror(3) stream status inquiries
fopen fopen(3) open a stream
fprintf printf(3) formatted output conversion
fputc putc(3) put character or word on a stream
fputs puts(3) put a string on a stream
fread fread(3) buffered binary input/output
freopen fopen(3) open a stream
fscanf scanf(3) formatted input conversion
fseek fseek(3) reposition a stream
ftell fseek(3) reposition a stream
fwrite fread(3) buffered binary input/output
getc getc(3) get character or word from stream
getchar getc(3) get character or word from stream
gets gets(3) get a string from a stream
getw getc(3) get character or word from stream
printf printf(3) formatted output conversion
putc putc(3) put character or word on a stream
putchar putc(3) put character or word on a stream
puts puts(3) put a string on a stream
putw putc(3) put character or word on a stream
rewind fseek(3) reposition a stream
scanf scanf(3) formatted input conversion
setbuf setbuf(3) assign buffering to a stream
setvbuf setbuf(3) assign buffering to a stream
snprintf printf(3) formatted output conversion
sprintf printf(3) formatted output conversion
sscanf scanf(3) formatted input conversion
ungetc ungetc(3) push character back into input stream
vfprintf printf(3) formatted output conversion
vfscanf scanf(3) formatted input conversion
vprintf printf(3) formatted output conversion
vscanf scanf(3) formatted input conversion
vsnprintf printf(3) formatted output conversion
vsprintf printf(3) formatted output conversion
vsscanf scanf(3) formatted input conversion
.fi

149
man/man3/string.3
View file

@ -1,149 +0,0 @@
.\" Copyright (c) 1980 Regents of the University of California.
.\" All rights reserved. The Berkeley software License Agreement
.\" specifies the terms and conditions for redistribution.
.\"
.\" @(#)string.3 6.1 (Berkeley) 5/15/85
.\"
.TH STRING 3 "May 15, 1985"
.UC 4
.SH NAME
string, strcat, strncat, strcmp, strncmp, strcpy, strncpy, strlen, strchr, strrchr, strerror, memcmp, memcpy, memmove, memchr, memset, index, rindex \- string operations
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <string.h>
char *strcat(char *\fIs1\fP, const char *\fIs2\fP)
char *strncat(char *\fIs1\fP, const char *\fIs2\fP, size_t \fIn\fP)
int strcmp(const char *\fIs1\fP, const char *\fIs2\fP)
int strncmp(const char *\fIs1\fP, const char *\fIs2\fP, size_t \fIn\fP)
char *strcpy(char *\fIs1\fP, const char *\fIs2\fP)
char *strncpy(char *\fIs1\fP, const char *\fIs2\fP, size_t \fIn\fP)
size_t strlen(const char *\fIs\fP)
char *strchr(const char *\fIs\fP, int \fIc\fP)
char *strrchr(const char *\fIs\fP, int \fIc\fP)
char *strerror(int \fIerrnum\fP)
int memcmp(const void *\fIs1\fP, const void *\fIs2\fP, size_t \fIn\fP)
void *memcpy(void *\fIs1\fP, const void *\fIs2\fP, size_t \fIn\fP)
void *memmove(void *\fIs1\fP, const void *\fIs2\fP, size_t \fIn\fP)
void *memchr(const void *\fIs\fP, int \fIc\fP, size_t \fIn\fP)
void *memset(void *\fIs\fP, int \fIc\fP, size_t \fIn\fP)
char *index(const char *\fIs\fP, int \fIc\fP)
char *rindex(const char *\fIs\fP, int \fIc\fP)
.ft R
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
These functions operate on null-terminated strings.
They do not check for overflow of any receiving string.
.PP
.B Strcat
appends a copy of string
.I s2
to the end of string
.IR s1 .
.B Strncat
copies at most
.I n
characters. Both return a pointer to the null-terminated result.
.PP
.B Strcmp
compares its arguments and returns an integer
greater than, equal to, or less than 0, according as
.I s1
is lexicographically greater than, equal to, or less than
.IR s2 .
.B Strncmp
makes the same comparison but looks at at most
.I n
characters.
.PP
.B Strcpy
copies string
.I s2
to
.IR s1 ,
stopping after the null character has been moved.
.B Strncpy
copies exactly
.I n
characters, truncating or null-padding
.I s2;
the target may not be null-terminated if the length of
.I s2
is
.I n
or more. Both return
.IR s1 .
.PP
.B Strlen
returns the number of non-null characters in
.IR s .
.PP
.B Strchr
.RB ( strrchr )
returns a pointer to the first (last) occurrence of character
.I c
in string
.I s,
or null if
.I c
does not occur in the string.
.PP
.B Strerror
returns the error string for the system call error
.IR errnum .
See
.BR intro (2).
.PP
.B Memcmp
is like
.B strcmp
except that the strings are memory blocks of length
.IR n .
Null characters are treated as ordinary characters.
.PP
.B Memcpy
copies
.I n
bytes from the location pointed to by
.I s2
to
.IR s1 .
.B Memmove
is like memcpy, except that it can handle overlap between the two strings.
Both functions return
.IR s1 .
.PP
.B Memchr
returns a pointer to the first occurrence of character
.I c
in string
.I s,
or null if
.I c
does not occur in the string.
.PP
.B Memset
sets
.I n
bytes to
.I c
starting at location
.IR s .
It returns
.IR s .
.PP
.B Index
and
.B rindex
are obsolete versions of
.B strchr
and
.BR strrchr .
New code should avoid using them.
.SH NOTES
Characters are compared as
.BR "unsigned char" ,
whether
.B char
itself is signed or not.

33
man/man3/strtol.3
View file

@ -1,33 +0,0 @@
.TH STRTOL 3 "December 9, 2009"
.UC 4
.SH NAME
strtol, strtoll, strtoul, strtoull \- convert string to number
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <stdlib.h>
long strtol(const char *\fInptr\fP, char **\fIendptr\fP, int \fIbase\fP);
unsigned long strtoul(const char *\fInptr\fP, char **\fIendptr\fP, int \fIbase\fP);
#ifdef __LONG_LONG_SUPPORTED
long long strtoll(const char *\fInptr\fP, char **\fIendptr\fP, int \fIbase\fP);
unsigned long long strtoull(const char *\fInptr\fP, char **\fIendptr\fP, int \fIbase\fP);
#endif
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
These functions parse as much from the string \fInptr\fP as possible and return
it as an integer. The string should consist of any number of whitespace
characters followed by a sign (either plus or minus) and at least one digit in
the specified \fIbase\fP. The digits of a hexadecimal string may be preceded by
the prefix 0x or 0X, which is ignored. If \fIbase\fP is zero, hexadecimal is
assumed if this prefix is present, octal is assumed if there is a leading zero
and decimal is assumed otherwise. If not zero, \fIbase\fP must be at least 2
and at most 36. A pointer to the first character following the numeric string is
stored in *\fIendptr\fP.
.PP
Note that the strtoll and strtoull functions, which return 64-bit values,
are supported only on GCC as ACK does not support 64-bit arithmatic.
.SH "RETURN VALUE
The parsed number is returned.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR atoi (3).

197
man/man3/syslog.3
View file

@ -1,197 +0,0 @@
.\" Written Feb 1994 by Steve Greenland (stevegr@neosoft.com)
.\"
.\" Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
.\" manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
.\" preserved on all copies.
.\"
.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
.\" manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
.\" entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
.\" permission notice identical to this one
.\"
.\" Since the Linux kernel and libraries are constantly changing, this
.\" manual page may be incorrect or out-of-date. The author(s) assume no
.\" responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from
.\" the use of the information contained herein. The author(s) may not
.\" have taken the same level of care in the production of this manual,
.\" which is licensed free of charge, as they might when working
.\" professionally.
.\"
.\" Formatted or processed versions of this manual, if unaccompanied by
.\" the source, must acknowledge the copyright and authors of this work.
.\"
.\" from SYSLOG 3 "15 Feb 1994" "Linux" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
.\" Modified for Minix porting by G. Falzoni <gfalzoni@inwind.it>
.\"
.\" Local macros
.de Xr
.BR \\$1 (\\$2)\\$3
..
.de LB
.TP \\$1
\\fB\\$2\\fR
\\$3
..
.de LI
.TP \\$1
\\fI\\$2\\fR
\\$3
..
.de LR
.TP \\$1
\\fR\\$2\\fR
\\$3
..
.\" end local macros
.TH SYSLOG 3 "Jan. 18, 2000"
.SH NAME
syslog, openlog, closelog \- send messages to the system logger
.SH SYNOPSIS
.B #include <syslog.h>
.sp
.BI "void openlog(char " *ident ", int " option ", int " facility)
.sp
.BI "void syslog(int " priority ", char " *format ", ...)"
.sp
.BI "void closelog(void)"
.sp
.SH DESCRIPTION
.B openlog()
opens a connection to the system logger for a program. The string pointed to by
.I ident
is added to each message, and is typically set to the program name. Values for
.I option
and
.I facility
are given in the next section. Its use is optional. It will automatically be called by
.B syslog()
if necessary, in which case
.I ident
will default to "syslog".
.sp
.B syslog()
generates a log message, which will be distributed by
.Xr syslogd 8 .
.I priority
is a combination of the
.I facility
and the
.IR level ,
values for which are given in the next section. The remaining arguments
are a
.IR format ,
as in
.Xr printf 3
and any arguments required by the
.IR format .
.\" except that the two character %m will be replaced by the error message string
.\" RI ( strerror )
.\" corresponding to the present value of
.\" IR errno .
.sp
.B closelog()
closes the descriptor being used to write to the system logger. Its use is optional.
.SH "PARAMETERS"
This section lists the parameters used to set the values of
.IR option , " facility" ", and " priority .
.SS option
The
.I option
argument to
.B openlog()
is an OR of any of these:
.TP
.B LOG_CONS
write directly to system console if there is an error while sending to
system logger
.TP
.B LOG_NDELAY
open the connection immediately (normally, the connection is opened when
the first message is logged)
.TP
.B LOG_PERROR
print to stderr as well
.TP
.B LOG_PID
include PID with each message
.SS facility
The
.I facility
argument is used to specify what type of program is logging the message.
This lets the configuration file specify that messages from different
facilities will be handled differently.
.TP
.B LOG_AUTH
security/authorization messages (DEPRECATED Use
.B LOG_AUTHPRIV
instead)
.TP
.B LOG_AUTHPRIV
security/authorization messages (private)
.TP
.B LOG_CRON
clock daemon
.RB ( cron " and " at )
.TP
.B LOG_DAEMON
other system daemons
.TP
.B LOG_KERN
kernel messages
.TP
.BR LOG_LOCAL0 " through " LOG_LOCAL7
reserved for local use
.TP
.B LOG_LPR
line printer subsystem
.TP
.B LOG_MAIL
mail subsystem
.TP
.B LOG_NEWS
USENET news subsystem
.TP
.B LOG_SYSLOG
messages generated internally by
.B syslogd
.TP
.BR LOG_USER (default)
generic user-level messages
.TP
.B LOG_UUCP
UUCP subsystem
.SS level
This determines the importance of the message. The levels are, in order
of decreasing importance:
.TP
.B LOG_EMERG
system is unusable
.TP
.B LOG_ALERT
action must be taken immediately
.TP
.B LOG_CRIT
critical conditions
.TP
.B LOG_ERR
error conditions
.TP
.B LOG_WARNING
warning conditions
.TP
.B LOG_NOTICE
normal, but significant, condition
.TP
.B LOG_INFO
informational message
.TP
.B LOG_DEBUG
debug-level message
.SH HISTORY
A
.B syslog
function call appeared in BSD 4.2.
.SH SEE ALSO
.Xr logger 1 ,
.Xr syslog.conf 5 ,
.Xr syslogd 8 .

30
man/man3/system.3
View file

@ -1,30 +0,0 @@
.\" @(#)system.3 6.1 (Berkeley) 5/15/85
.\"
.TH SYSTEM 3 "May 15, 1985"
.AT 3
.SH NAME
system \- issue a shell command
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <stdlib.h>
int system(const char *\fIstring\fP)
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
.B System
causes the
.I string
to be given to
.BR sh (1)
as input as if the string had been typed as a command
at a terminal.
The current process waits until the shell has
completed, then returns the exit status of the shell.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR sh (1),
.BR popen (3),
.BR execve (2),
.BR wait (2).
.SH DIAGNOSTICS
Exit status 127 indicates the shell couldn't be executed.

167
man/man3/termcap.3
View file

@ -1,167 +0,0 @@
.\" Copyright (c) 1980 Regents of the University of California.
.\" All rights reserved. The Berkeley software License Agreement
.\" specifies the terms and conditions for redistribution.
.\"
.\" @(#)termcap.3x 6.1 (Berkeley) 5/15/85
.\"
.TH TERMCAP 3 "May 15, 1985"
.UC 4
.SH NAME
termcap, tgetent, tgetnum, tgetflag, tgetstr, tgoto, tputs \- terminal independent operation routines
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <termcap.h>
int tgetent(char *\fIbp\fP, char *\fIname\fP)
int tgetflag(char *\fIid\fP)
int tgetnum(char *\fIid\fP)
char *tgetstr(char *\fIid\fP, char **\fIarea\fP)
char *tgoto(char *\fIcm\fP, int \fIdestcol\fP, int \fIdestline\fP)
int tputs(char *\fIcp\fP, int \fIaffcnt\fP, void (*\fIoutc\fP)(int))
.ft R
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
These functions extract and use capabilities from the terminal capability data
base
.BR termcap (5).
These are low level routines;
see
.BR curses (3)
for a higher level package.
.PP
.B Tgetent
extracts the entry for terminal
.I name
into the buffer at
.IR bp .
.I Bp
should be a character buffer of size
1024 and must be retained through all subsequent calls
to
.BR tgetnum ,
.BR tgetflag ,
and
.BR tgetstr .
.B Tgetent
returns \-1 if it cannot find a termcap
file, 0 if the terminal name given does not have an entry,
and 1 if all goes well.
.PP
.B Tgetent
uses the following recipe to find the termcap file and entry
.IR name :
.PP
.in +5n
if $TERMCAP is itself a termcap entry for
.I name
.br
then
.in +5n
use $TERMCAP
.in -5n
elif $TERMCAP names a file
.br
then
.in +5n
use entry
.I name
found in that file
.in -5n
elif this is Minix-vmd
.br
then
.in +5n
if $TERMPATH is defined
.br
then
.in +5n
search the termcap files named in $TERMPATH for the first occurance of a
.I name
entry and use that entry
.in -5n
else
.in +5n
the path
.B $HOME/.termcap:/etc/termcap:/usr/etc/termcap"
is searched for entry
.I name
.in -5n
fi
.in -5n
fi
.in -5n
.RE
.PP
.B Tgetnum
gets the numeric value of capability
.IR id ,
returning \-1 if is not given for the terminal.
.B Tgetflag
returns 1 if the specified capability is present in
the terminal's entry, 0 if it is not.
.B Tgetstr
returns the string value of the capability
.IR id ,
places it in the buffer at
.IR area ,
and advances the
.I area
pointer.
It decodes the abbreviations for this field described in
.BR termcap (5),
except for cursor addressing and padding information.
.B Tgetstr
returns NULL if the capability was not found.
.PP
.B Tgoto
returns a cursor addressing string decoded from
.I cm
to go to column
.I destcol
in line
.IR destline .
It uses the external variables
.B UP
(from the \fBup\fR capability)
and
.B BC
(if \fBbc\fR is given rather than \fBbs\fR)
if necessary to avoid placing \fB\en\fR, \fB^D\fR or \fB^@\fR in
the returned string.
(Programs which call tgoto should be sure to turn off the XTABS bit(s),
since
.B tgoto
may now output a tab.
Note that programs using termcap should in general turn off XTABS
anyway since some terminals use CTRL-I for other functions,
such as nondestructive space.)
If a \fB%\fR sequence is given which is not understood, then
.B tgoto
returns \*(lqOOPS\*(rq.
.PP
.B Tputs
decodes the leading padding information of the string
.IR cp ;
.I affcnt
gives the number of lines affected by the operation, or 1 if this is
not applicable,
.I outc
is a routine which is called with each character in turn.
The external variable
.B ospeed
should contain the output speed of the terminal as encoded by
.BR stty (3).
The external variable
.B PC
should contain a pad character to be used (from the \fBpc\fR capability)
if a null (\fB^@\fR) is inappropriate.
.SH SEE ALSO
.BR curses (3),
.BR termcap (5).
.SH AUTHOR
William Joy
.SH NOTES
The MINIX 3 implementation does not support any of the external variables,
only the functions calls. The Minix-vmd termcap does support it all,
although noone in his right mind meddles with those variables.

155
man/man3/termios.3
View file

@ -1,155 +0,0 @@
.TH TERMIOS 3
.SH NAME
termios, tcgetattr, tcsetattr, cfgetispeed, cfgetospeed, cfsetispeed, cfsetospeed, tcsendbreak, tcdrain, tcflush, tcflow \- change terminal attributes
.SH SYNOPSIS
.ft B
.nf
#include <termios.h>
int tcgetattr(int \fIfd\fP, struct termios *\fItp\fP)
int tcsetattr(int \fIfd\fP, int \fIaction\fP, const struct termios *\fItp\fP)
speed_t cfgetispeed(const struct termios *\fItp\fP)
speed_t cfgetospeed(const struct termios *\fItp\fP)
int cfsetispeed(struct termios *\fItp\fP, speed_t \fIspeed\fP)
int cfsetospeed(struct termios *\fItp\fP, speed_t \fIspeed\fP)
int tcsendbreak(int \fIfd\fP, int \fIduration\fP)
int tcdrain(int \fIfd\fP)
int tcflush(int \fIfd\fP, int \fIqueue_selector\fP)
int tcflow(int \fIfd\fP, int \fIaction\fP)
.fi
.ft P
.SH DESCRIPTION
.de SP
.if t .sp 0.4
.if n .sp
..
These are the user functions that modify the tty attributes mentioned in
.BR tty (4).
In the following,
.I fd
refers to an open terminal device file,
.I tp
is the address of a
.BR "struct termios" ,
and
.I speed
and values of type
.B speed_t
are equal to one of the
.BR B0 ,
.BR B50 ,
etc. baud rate symbols. All functions, symbols, and types are declared in
.BR <termios.h> .
.PP
The effects of the tty functions are:
.TP
.B tcgetattr(\fIfd\fP, \fItp\fP)
Get the current settings of the tty attributes.
.TP
.B tcsetattr(\fIfd\fP, TCSANOW, \fItp\fP)
Set the terminal attributes. The change occurs immediately.
.TP
.B tcsetattr(\fIfd\fP, TCSADRAIN, \fItp\fP)
Set the terminal attributes. The change occurs once all the output waiting
in the output queues has been transmitted. This should be used when options
affecting output are changed.
.TP
.B tcsetattr(\fIfd\fP, TCSAFLUSH, \fItp\fP)
Set the terminal attributes. But first wait until all the output waiting
in the output queues has been transmitted. All input waiting in the input
queues is then discarded and the change is made. This should be used when
switching from canonical to non-canonical mode or vice-versa. (Oddly
enough, this is seldom what you want, because it discards typeahead. An
editing shell does the Right Thing if it uses
.B TCSANOW
instead. \s-2POSIX\s+2 may not guarantee good results, but in practice most
systems make the canonical input available in raw mode.)
.TP
.B cfgetispeed(\fItp\fP)
Return the input baud rate encoded in the termios structure.
.TP
.B cfgetospeed(\fItp\fP)
Return the output baud rate encoded in the termios structure.
.TP
.B cfsetispeed(\fItp\fP, \fIspeed\fP)
Encode the new input baud rate into the termios structure.
.TP
.B cfsetospeed(\fItp\fP, \fIspeed\fP)
Encode the new output baud rate into the termios structure.
.TP
.B tcsendbreak(\fIfd\fP, \fIduration\fP)
Emit a break condition on a serial line for a time indicated by
.IR duration .
(Always 0.4 seconds under MINIX 3,
.I duration
is ignored.)
.TP
.B tcdrain(\fIfd\fP)
Wait until all output waiting in the output queues has been transmitted.
.TP
.B tcflush(\fIfd\fP, TCIFLUSH)
Flush the input queue. (I.e. discard it.)
.TP
.B tcflush(\fIfd\fP, TCOFLUSH)
Flush the output queue.
.TP
.B tcflush(\fIfd\fP, TCIOFLUSH)
Flush the input and output queues.
.TP
.B tcflow(\fIfd\fP, TCOOFF)
Suspend output. (Like the effect of
.BR STOP .)
.TP
.B tcflow(\fIfd\fP, TCOON)
Restart output. (Like the effect of
.BR START .)
.TP
.B tcflow(\fIfd\fP, TCIOFF)
Transmit a
.B STOP
character intended to make the remote device stop transmitting data.
.TP
.B tcflow(\fIfd\fP, TCION)
Transmit a
.B START
character to restart the remote device.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR stty (1),
.BR tty (4).
.SH DIAGNOSTICS
All functions return 0 unless otherwise specified, and \-1 on error with
.B errno
set to indicate the type of error. The most notable errors are
.B ENOTTY
if
.I fd
does not refer to a terminal device, and
.B EINTR
if one of the functions waiting for output to drain is interrupted.
.SH NOTES
It may be interesting to know that the functions operating on the tty are
directly translated into the following MINIX 3
.B ioctl
requests:
.BR TCGETS ,
.BR TCSETS
(now),
.BR TCSETSW
(drain),
.BR TCSETSF ,
(flush),
.BR TCSBRK ,
.BR TCDRAIN ,
.BR TCFLSH ,
and
.BR TCFLOW .
You should only use this knowledge when trying to understand the tty driver
code, of course.
.SH BUGS
.SH AUTHOR
Kees J. Bot (kjb@cs.vu.nl)
.\"
.\" $PchId: termios.3,v 1.2 1996/04/11 06:41:24 philip Exp $

121
man/man3/time2posix.3
View file

@ -1,121 +0,0 @@
.TH TIME2POSIX 3
.SH NAME
time2posix, posix2time \- convert seconds since the Epoch
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.B #include <sys/types.h>
.B #include <time.h>
.PP
.B time_t time2posix(t)
.B time_t t
.PP
.B time_t posix2time(t)
.B time_t t
.PP
.B cc ... -ltz
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
IEEE Standard 1003.1
(POSIX)
legislates that a time_t value of
536457599 shall correspond to "Wed Dec 31 23:59:59 UTC 1986."
This effectively implies that POSIX time_t's cannot include leap
seconds and,
therefore,
that the system time must be adjusted as each leap occurs.
.PP
If the time package is configured with leap-second support
enabled,
however,
no such adjustment is needed and
time_t values continue to increase over leap events
(as a true `seconds since...' value).
This means that these values will differ from those required by POSIX
by the net number of leap seconds inserted since the Epoch.
.PP
Typically this is not a problem as the type time_t is intended
to be
(mostly)
opaque\(emtime_t values should only be obtained-from and
passed-to functions such as
.IR time(2) ,
.IR localtime(3) ,
.IR mktime(3) ,
and
.IR difftime(3) .
However,
POSIX gives an arithmetic
expression for directly computing a time_t value from a given date/time,
and the same relationship is assumed by some
(usually older)
applications.
Any programs creating/dissecting time_t's
using such a relationship will typically not handle intervals
over leap seconds correctly.
.PP
The
.I time2posix
and
.I posix2time
functions are provided to address this time_t mismatch by converting
between local time_t values and their POSIX equivalents.
This is done by accounting for the number of time-base changes that
would have taken place on a POSIX system as leap seconds were inserted
or deleted.
These converted values can then be used in lieu of correcting the older
applications,
or when communicating with POSIX-compliant systems.
.PP
.I Time2posix
is single-valued.
That is,
every local time_t
corresponds to a single POSIX time_t.
.I Posix2time
is less well-behaved:
for a positive leap second hit the result is not unique,
and for a negative leap second hit the corresponding
POSIX time_t doesn't exist so an adjacent value is returned.
Both of these are good indicators of the inferiority of the
POSIX representation.
.PP
The following table summarizes the relationship between a time
T and it's conversion to,
and back from,
the POSIX representation over the leap second inserted at the end of June,
1993.
.nf
.ta \w'93/06/30 'u +\w'23:59:59 'u +\w'A+0 'u +\w'X=time2posix(T) 'u
DATE TIME T X=time2posix(T) posix2time(X)
93/06/30 23:59:59 A+0 B+0 A+0
93/06/30 23:59:60 A+1 B+1 A+1 or A+2
93/07/01 00:00:00 A+2 B+1 A+1 or A+2
93/07/01 00:00:01 A+3 B+2 A+3
A leap second deletion would look like...
DATE TIME T X=time2posix(T) posix2time(X)
??/06/30 23:59:58 A+0 B+0 A+0
??/07/01 00:00:00 A+1 B+2 A+1
??/07/01 00:00:01 A+2 B+3 A+2
.sp
.ce
[Note: posix2time(B+1) => A+0 or A+1]
.fi
.PP
If leap-second support is not enabled,
local time_t's and
POSIX time_t's are equivalent,
and both
.I time2posix
and
.I posix2time
degenerate to the identity function.
.SH SEE ALSO
difftime(3),
localtime(3),
mktime(3),
time(2)
.\" @(#)time2posix.3 7.8
.\" This file is in the public domain, so clarified as of
.\" 1996-06-05 by Arthur David Olson.

28
man/man3/ttyname.3
View file

@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
.TH TTYNAME 3
.SH NAME
ttyname \- file descriptor to terminal device name
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#define _POSIX_SOURCE 1
#include <unistd.h>
char *ttyname(int \fIfd\fP)
.ft P
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
.B Ttyname
searches through the
.B /dev
directory for the terminal device file that is associated with file
descriptor
.IR fd .
It returns the full path name of the terminal file if found, NULL is
returned otherwise.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR ttyslot (3).
.SH AUTHOR
Kees J. Bot (kjb@cs.vu.nl)
.\"
.\" $PchId: ttyname.3,v 1.2 1996/04/11 06:42:17 philip Exp $

56
man/man3/ttyslot.3
View file

@ -1,56 +0,0 @@
.TH TTYSLOT 3
.SH NAME
ttyslot, fttyslot \- utmp slot number
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#define _MINIX_SOURCE 1
#include <unistd.h>
int ttyslot(void)
int fttyslot(int \fIfd\fP)
.fi
.ft P
.SH DESCRIPTION
.B Ttyslot()
returns the index of the login terminal in the
.B utmp
file. It tries
.B fttyslot()
on file descriptors
.BR 0,
.BR 1,
and
.BR 2
to find the index.
.PP
.B Fttyslot()
returns the utmp index of the terminal associated with file descriptor
.IR fd .
First it tries to map
.I fd
to a terminal name with
.BR ttyname (3),
then it searches the
.BR ttytab (5)
database with the
.BR getttyent (3)
function for this terminal. This means that the utmp slot number is the
same as the ttytab entry number counting from 1. The value 0 is returned if
no slot number can be found for a file descriptor.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR ttyname (3),
.BR getttyent (3),
.BR utmp (5),
.BR ttytab (5),
.BR init (8).
.SH NOTES
Since 0 is used as an error return this means that the first entry in the
utmp file is not used.
.PP
.B Ttyslot()
is often found in a UNIX implementation,
.B fttyslot()
is MINIX 3 specific.
.SH AUTHOR
Kees J. Bot (kjb@cs.vu.nl)

41
man/man3/ungetc.3
View file

@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
.\" @(#)ungetc.3s 6.1 (Berkeley) 5/15/85
.\"
.TH UNGETC 3 "May 15, 1985"
.AT 3
.SH NAME
ungetc \- push character back into input stream
.SH SYNOPSIS
.nf
.ft B
#include <stdio.h>
int ungetc(int \fIc\fP, FILE *\fIstream\fP)
.ft R
.fi
.SH DESCRIPTION
.B Ungetc
pushes the character
.I c
back on an input stream. That character will be returned by the next
.B getc
call on that stream.
.B Ungetc
returns
.IR c .
.PP
One character of pushback is guaranteed provided
something has been read from the stream and the stream is actually buffered.
Attempts to push EOF are rejected.
.PP
.BR Fseek (3)
erases all memory of pushed back characters.
.SH "SEE ALSO"
.BR getc (3),
.BR setbuf (3),
.BR fseek (3).
.SH DIAGNOSTICS
.B Ungetc
returns
.SM
.B EOF
if it can't push a character back.

2
man/man5/Makefile
View file

@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
MAN= boot.cfg.5 configfile.5 crontab.5 dhcp.conf.5 dir.5 ethers.5 \
fstab.5 hosts.5 httpd.conf.5 http_status.5 keymap.5 \
passwd.5 resolv.conf.5 resolver.5 rhosts.5 statvfs.5 serv.access.5 \
system.conf.5 syslog.conf.5 termcap.5 ttytab.5 TZ.5 tzfile.5 utmp.5 \
system.conf.5 syslog.conf.5 termcap.5 ttytab.5 TZ.5 utmp.5 \
whatis.5 pkg_install.conf.5 pkg_summary.5
MLINKS += passwd.5 group.5

138
man/man5/tzfile.5
View file

@ -1,138 +0,0 @@
.TH TZFILE 5
.SH NAME
tzfile \- time zone information
.SH SYNOPSIS
.B
#include <tzfile.h>
.SH DESCRIPTION
The time zone information files used by
.IR tzset (3)
begin with the magic characters "TZif" to identify then as
time zone information files,
followed by sixteen bytes reserved for future use,
followed by six four-byte values of type
.BR long ,
written in a ``standard'' byte order
(the high-order byte of the value is written first).
These values are,
in order:
.TP
.I tzh_ttisgmtcnt
The number of UTC/local indicators stored in the file.
.TP
.I tzh_ttisstdcnt
The number of standard/wall indicators stored in the file.
.TP
.I tzh_leapcnt
The number of leap seconds for which data is stored in the file.
.TP
.I tzh_timecnt
The number of "transition times" for which data is stored
in the file.
.TP
.I tzh_typecnt
The number of "local time types" for which data is stored
in the file (must not be zero).
.TP
.I tzh_charcnt
The number of characters of "time zone abbreviation strings"
stored in the file.
.PP
The above header is followed by
.I tzh_timecnt
four-byte values of type
.BR long ,
sorted in ascending order.
These values are written in ``standard'' byte order.
Each is used as a transition time (as returned by
.IR time (2))
at which the rules for computing local time change.
Next come
.I tzh_timecnt
one-byte values of type
.BR "unsigned char" ;
each one tells which of the different types of ``local time'' types
described in the file is associated with the same-indexed transition time.
These values serve as indices into an array of
.I ttinfo
structures that appears next in the file;
these structures are defined as follows:
.in +.5i
.sp
.nf
.ta .5i +\w'unsigned int\0\0'u
struct ttinfo {
long tt_gmtoff;
int tt_isdst;
unsigned int tt_abbrind;
};
.in -.5i
.fi
.sp
Each structure is written as a four-byte value for
.I tt_gmtoff
of type
.BR long ,
in a standard byte order, followed by a one-byte value for
.I tt_isdst
and a one-byte value for
.IR tt_abbrind .
In each structure,
.I tt_gmtoff
gives the number of seconds to be added to UTC,
.I tt_isdst
tells whether
.I tm_isdst
should be set by
.I localtime (3)
and
.I tt_abbrind
serves as an index into the array of time zone abbreviation characters
that follow the
.I ttinfo
structure(s) in the file.
.PP
Then there are
.I tzh_leapcnt
pairs of four-byte values, written in standard byte order;
the first value of each pair gives the time
(as returned by
.IR time(2))
at which a leap second occurs;
the second gives the
.I total
number of leap seconds to be applied after the given time.
The pairs of values are sorted in ascending order by time.
.PP
Then there are
.I tzh_ttisstdcnt
standard/wall indicators, each stored as a one-byte value;
they tell whether the transition times associated with local time types
were specified as standard time or wall clock time,
and are used when a time zone file is used in handling POSIX-style
time zone environment variables.
.PP
Finally there are
.I tzh_ttisgmtcnt
UTC/local indicators, each stored as a one-byte value;
they tell whether the transition times associated with local time types
were specified as UTC or local time,
and are used when a time zone file is used in handling POSIX-style
time zone environment variables.
.PP
.I Localtime
uses the first standard-time
.I ttinfo
structure in the file
(or simply the first
.I ttinfo
structure in the absence of a standard-time structure)
if either
.I tzh_timecnt
is zero or the time argument is less than the first transition time recorded
in the file.
.SH SEE ALSO
newctime(3)
.\" @(#)tzfile.5 7.12
.\" This file is in the public domain, so clarified as of
.\" 1996-06-05 by Arthur David Olson.

1
man/man7/Makefile
View file

@ -4,7 +4,6 @@ MAN= ascii.7 environ.7 hier.7 man.7 \
\
\
\
re_format.7 \
pkgsrc.7
.include <bsd.man.mk>

269
man/man7/re_format.7
View file

@ -1,269 +0,0 @@
.\" Copyright (c) 1992, 1993, 1994 Henry Spencer.
.\" Copyright (c) 1992, 1993, 1994
.\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
.\"
.\" This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
.\" Henry Spencer.
.\"
.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
.\" are met:
.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
.\" must display the following acknowledgement:
.\" This product includes software developed by the University of
.\" California, Berkeley and its contributors.
.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
.\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
.\" without specific prior written permission.
.\"
.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
.\"
.\" @(#)re_format.7 8.3 (Berkeley) 3/20/94
.\"
.TH RE_FORMAT 7 "March 20, 1994"
.SH NAME
re_format \- POSIX 1003.2 regular expressions
.SH DESCRIPTION
Regular expressions (``RE''s),
as defined in POSIX 1003.2, come in two forms:
modern REs (roughly those of
.BR egrep ;
1003.2 calls these ``extended'' REs)
and obsolete REs (roughly those of
.BR ed ;
1003.2 ``basic'' REs).
Obsolete REs mostly exist for backward compatibility in some old programs;
they will be discussed at the end.
1003.2 leaves some aspects of RE syntax and semantics open;
`\(dg' marks decisions on these aspects that
may not be fully portable to other 1003.2 implementations.
.PP
A (modern) RE is one\(dg or more non-empty\(dg \fIbranches\fR,
separated by `|'.
It matches anything that matches one of the branches.
.PP
A branch is one\(dg or more \fIpieces\fR, concatenated.
It matches a match for the first, followed by a match for the second, etc.
.PP
A piece is an \fIatom\fR possibly followed
by a single\(dg `*', `+', `?', or \fIbound\fR.
An atom followed by `*' matches a sequence of 0 or more matches of the atom.
An atom followed by `+' matches a sequence of 1 or more matches of the atom.
An atom followed by `?' matches a sequence of 0 or 1 matches of the atom.
.PP
A \fIbound\fR is `{' followed by an unsigned decimal integer,
possibly followed by `,'
possibly followed by another unsigned decimal integer,
always followed by `}'.
The integers must lie between 0 and RE_DUP_MAX (255\(dg) inclusive,
and if there are two of them, the first may not exceed the second.
An atom followed by a bound containing one integer \fIi\fR
and no comma matches
a sequence of exactly \fIi\fR matches of the atom.
An atom followed by a bound
containing one integer \fIi\fR and a comma matches
a sequence of \fIi\fR or more matches of the atom.
An atom followed by a bound
containing two integers \fIi\fR and \fIj\fR matches
a sequence of \fIi\fR through \fIj\fR (inclusive) matches of the atom.
.PP
An atom is a regular expression enclosed in `()' (matching a match for the
regular expression),
an empty set of `()' (matching the null string)\(dg,
a \fIbracket expression\fR (see below), `.'
(matching any single character), `^' (matching the null string at the
beginning of a line), `$' (matching the null string at the
end of a line), a `\e' followed by one of the characters
`^.[$()|*+?{\e'
(matching that character taken as an ordinary character),
a `\e' followed by any other character\(dg
(matching that character taken as an ordinary character,
as if the `\e' had not been present\(dg),
or a single character with no other significance (matching that character).
A `{' followed by a character other than a digit is an ordinary
character, not the beginning of a bound\(dg.
It is illegal to end an RE with `\e'.
.PP
A \fIbracket expression\fR is a list of characters enclosed in `[]'.
It normally matches any single character from the list (but see below).
If the list begins with `^',
it matches any single character
(but see below) \fInot\fR from the rest of the list.
If two characters in the list are separated by `\-', this is shorthand
for the full \fIrange\fR of characters between those two (inclusive) in the
collating sequence,
e.g. `[0-9]' in ASCII matches any decimal digit.
It is illegal\(dg for two ranges to share an
endpoint, e.g. `a-c-e'.
Ranges are very collating-sequence-dependent,
and portable programs should avoid relying on them.
.PP
To include a literal `]' in the list, make it the first character
(following a possible `^').
To include a literal `\-', make it the first or last character,
or the second endpoint of a range.
To use a literal `\-' as the first endpoint of a range,
enclose it in `[.' and `.]' to make it a collating element (see below).
With the exception of these and some combinations using `[' (see next
paragraphs), all other special characters, including `\e', lose their
special significance within a bracket expression.
.PP
Within a bracket expression, a collating element (a character,
a multi-character sequence that collates as if it were a single character,
or a collating-sequence name for either)
enclosed in `[.' and `.]' stands for the
sequence of characters of that collating element.
The sequence is a single element of the bracket expression's list.
A bracket expression containing a multi-character collating element
can thus match more than one character,
e.g. if the collating sequence includes a `ch' collating element,
then the RE `[[.ch.]]*c' matches the first five characters
of `chchcc'.
.PP
Within a bracket expression, a collating element enclosed in `[=' and
`=]' is an equivalence class, standing for the sequences of characters
of all collating elements equivalent to that one, including itself.
(If there are no other equivalent collating elements,
the treatment is as if the enclosing delimiters were `[.' and `.]'.)
For example, if o and \o'o^' are the members of an equivalence class,
then `[[=o=]]', `[[=\o'o^'=]]', and `[o\o'o^']' are all synonymous.
An equivalence class may not\(dg be an endpoint
of a range.
.PP
Within a bracket expression, the name of a \fIcharacter class\fR enclosed
in `[:' and `:]' stands for the list of all characters belonging to that
class.
Standard character class names are:
.PP
.RS
.nf
.ta 3c 6c 9c
alnum digit punct
alpha graph space
blank lower upper
cntrl print xdigit
.fi
.RE
.PP
These stand for the character classes defined in
.BR ctype (3).
A locale may provide others.
A character class may not be used as an endpoint of a range.
.PP
There are two special cases\(dg of bracket expressions:
the bracket expressions `[[:<:]]' and `[[:>:]]' match the null string at
the beginning and end of a word respectively.
A word is defined as a sequence of
word characters
which is neither preceded nor followed by
word characters.
A word character is an
.B alnum
character (as defined by
.BR ctype (3))
or an underscore.
This is an extension,
compatible with but not specified by POSIX 1003.2,
and should be used with
caution in software intended to be portable to other systems.
.PP
In the event that an RE could match more than one substring of a given
string,
the RE matches the one starting earliest in the string.
If the RE could match more than one substring starting at that point,
it matches the longest.
Subexpressions also match the longest possible substrings, subject to
the constraint that the whole match be as long as possible,
with subexpressions starting earlier in the RE taking priority over
ones starting later.
Note that higher-level subexpressions thus take priority over
their lower-level component subexpressions.
.PP
Match lengths are measured in characters, not collating elements.
A null string is considered longer than no match at all.
For example,
`bb*' matches the three middle characters of `abbbc',
`(wee|week)(knights|nights)' matches all ten characters of `weeknights',
when `(.*).*' is matched against `abc' the parenthesized subexpression
matches all three characters, and
when `(a*)*' is matched against `bc' both the whole RE and the parenthesized
subexpression match the null string.
.PP
If case-independent matching is specified,
the effect is much as if all case distinctions had vanished from the
alphabet.
When an alphabetic that exists in multiple cases appears as an
ordinary character outside a bracket expression, it is effectively
transformed into a bracket expression containing both cases,
e.g. `x' becomes `[xX]'.
When it appears inside a bracket expression, all case counterparts
of it are added to the bracket expression, so that (e.g.) `[x]'
becomes `[xX]' and `[^x]' becomes `[^xX]'.
.PP
No particular limit is imposed on the length of REs\(dg.
Programs intended to be portable should not employ REs longer
than 256 bytes,
as an implementation can refuse to accept such REs and remain
POSIX-compliant.
.PP
Obsolete (``basic'') regular expressions differ in several respects.
`|', `+', and `?' are ordinary characters and there is no equivalent
for their functionality.
The delimiters for bounds are `\e{' and `\e}',
with `{' and `}' by themselves ordinary characters.
The parentheses for nested subexpressions are `\e(' and `\e)',
with `(' and `)' by themselves ordinary characters.
`^' is an ordinary character except at the beginning of the
RE or\(dg the beginning of a parenthesized subexpression,
`$' is an ordinary character except at the end of the
RE or\(dg the end of a parenthesized subexpression,
and `*' is an ordinary character if it appears at the beginning of the
RE or the beginning of a parenthesized subexpression
(after a possible leading `^').
Finally, there is one new type of atom, a \fIback reference\fR:
`\e' followed by a non-zero decimal digit \fId\fR
matches the same sequence of characters
matched by the \fId\fRth parenthesized subexpression
(numbering subexpressions by the positions of their opening parentheses,
left to right),
so that (e.g.) `\e([bc]\e)\e1' matches `bb' or `cc' but not `bc'.
.SH SEE ALSO
regex(3)
.PP
POSIX 1003.2, section 2.8 (Regular Expression Notation).
.SH BUGS
Having two kinds of REs is a botch.
.PP
The current 1003.2 spec says that `)' is an ordinary character in
the absence of an unmatched `(';
this was an unintentional result of a wording error,
and change is likely.
Avoid relying on it.
.PP
Back references are a dreadful botch,
posing major problems for efficient implementations.
They are also somewhat vaguely defined
(does
`a\e(\e(b\e)*\e2\e)*d' match `abbbd'?).
Avoid using them.
.PP
1003.2's specification of case-independent matching is vague.
The ``one case implies all cases'' definition given above
is current consensus among implementors as to the right interpretation.
.PP
The syntax for word boundaries is incredibly ugly.

647
share/mk/bsd.lib.mk
View file

@ -2,24 +2,57 @@
# @(#)bsd.lib.mk 8.3 (Berkeley) 4/22/94
.include <bsd.init.mk>
#.include <bsd.shlib.mk>
#.include <bsd.gcc.mk>
# Pull in <bsd.sys.mk> here so we can override its .c.o rule
.include <bsd.sys.mk>
LIBISMODULE?= no
LIBISPRIVATE?= no
LIBISCXX?= no
##### Minix rule to make the "install" target depend on
##### "all" and "depend" targets
realinstall: realall
realall: depend
# Some tough Minix defaults
MKPROFILE:= no
MKSTATICLIB:= yes
MKPIC:= no
MKLINT:= no
_LIB_PREFIX= lib
.if ${LIBISMODULE} != "no"
_LIB_PREFIX= # empty
MKDEBUGLIB:= no
MKLINT:= no
MKPICINSTALL:= no
MKPROFILE:= no
MKSTATICLIB:= no
.endif
.if ${LIBISPRIVATE} != "no"
MKDEBUGLIB:= no
MKLINT:= no
MKPICINSTALL:= no
. if defined(NOSTATICLIB) && ${MKPICLIB} != "no"
MKSTATICLIB:= no
. else
MKPIC:= no
. endif
MKPROFILE:= no
.endif
##### Basic targets
.PHONY: libinstall
realinstall: libinstall
.PHONY: checkver libinstall
realinstall: checkver libinstall
clean: cleanlib
##### LIB specific flags.
# XXX: This is needed for programs that link with .a libraries
# Perhaps a more correct solution is to always generate _pic.a
# files or always have a shared library.
.if defined(MKPIE) && (${MKPIE} != "no")
CFLAGS+= ${PIE_CFLAGS}
AFLAGS+= ${PIE_AFLAGS}
.endif
COPTS+= ${COPTS.lib${LIB}}
CPPFLAGS+= ${CPPFLAGS.lib${LIB}}
CXXFLAGS+= ${CXXFLAGS.lib${LIB}}
@ -43,10 +76,151 @@ DPADD+= ${LIBDO.${_lib}}/lib${_lib}.so
##### Build and install rules
MKDEP_SUFFIXES?= .o .po .so .go .ln
# Use purely kernel private headers in rump builds
.if !defined(RUMPKERNEL)
.if empty(CPPFLAGS:M-nostdinc)
CPPFLAGS+= ${DESTDIR:D-nostdinc ${CPPFLAG_ISYSTEM} ${DESTDIR}/usr/include}
.endif
.if empty(CXXFLAGS:M-nostdinc++)
CXXFLAGS+= ${DESTDIR:D-nostdinc++ ${CPPFLAG_ISYSTEMXX} ${DESTDIR}/usr/include/g++}
.endif
.endif
.if !defined(SHLIB_MAJOR) && exists(${SHLIB_VERSION_FILE}) # {
SHLIB_MAJOR != . ${SHLIB_VERSION_FILE} ; echo $$major
SHLIB_MINOR != . ${SHLIB_VERSION_FILE} ; echo $$minor
SHLIB_TEENY != . ${SHLIB_VERSION_FILE} ; echo $$teeny
DPADD+= ${SHLIB_VERSION_FILE}
# Check for higher installed library versions.
.if !defined(NOCHECKVER) && !defined(NOCHECKVER_${LIB}) && \
exists(${NETBSDSRCDIR}/lib/checkver)
checkver:
@(cd ${.CURDIR} && \
HOST_SH=${HOST_SH:Q} AWK=${TOOL_AWK:Q} \
${HOST_SH} ${NETBSDSRCDIR}/lib/checkver -v ${SHLIB_VERSION_FILE} \
-d ${DESTDIR}${_LIBSODIR} ${LIB})
.endif
.endif # }
.if !target(checkver)
checkver:
.endif
print-shlib-major:
.if defined(SHLIB_MAJOR) && ${MKPIC} != "no"
@echo ${SHLIB_MAJOR}
.else
@false
.endif
print-shlib-minor:
.if defined(SHLIB_MINOR) && ${MKPIC} != "no"
@echo ${SHLIB_MINOR}
.else
@false
.endif
print-shlib-teeny:
.if defined(SHLIB_TEENY) && ${MKPIC} != "no"
@echo ${SHLIB_TEENY}
.else
@false
.endif
.if defined(SHLIB_MAJOR) && !empty(SHLIB_MAJOR) # {
.if defined(SHLIB_MINOR) && !empty(SHLIB_MINOR)
.if defined(SHLIB_TEENY) && !empty(SHLIB_TEENY)
SHLIB_FULLVERSION=${SHLIB_MAJOR}.${SHLIB_MINOR}.${SHLIB_TEENY}
.else
SHLIB_FULLVERSION=${SHLIB_MAJOR}.${SHLIB_MINOR}
.endif
.else
SHLIB_FULLVERSION=${SHLIB_MAJOR}
.endif
.endif # }
# add additional suffixes not exported.
# .po is used for profiling object files.
# .so is used for PIC object files.
.SUFFIXES: .out .a .ln .so .po .go .o .s .S .c .cc .cpp .cxx .C .m .F .f .r .y .l .cl .p .h
.SUFFIXES: .sh .m4 .m
# Set PICFLAGS to cc flags for producing position-independent code,
# if not already set. Includes -DPIC, if required.
# Data-driven table using make variables to control how shared libraries
# are built for different platforms and object formats.
# OBJECT_FMT: currently either "ELF" or "a.out", from <bsd.own.mk>
# SHLIB_SOVERSION: version number to be compiled into a shared library
# via -soname. Usualy ${SHLIB_MAJOR} on ELF.
# NetBSD/pmax used to use ${SHLIB_MAJOR}[.${SHLIB_MINOR}
# [.${SHLIB_TEENY}]]
# SHLIB_SHFLAGS: Flags to tell ${LD} to emit shared library.
# with ELF, also set shared-lib version for ld.so.
# SHLIB_LDSTARTFILE: support .o file, call C++ file-level constructors
# SHLIB_LDENDFILE: support .o file, call C++ file-level destructors
# FPICFLAGS: flags for ${FC} to compile .[fF] files to .so objects.
# CPPPICFLAGS: flags for ${CPP} to preprocess .[sS] files for ${AS}
# CPICFLAGS: flags for ${CC} to compile .[cC] files to pic objects.
# CSHLIBFLAGS: flags for ${CC} to compile .[cC] files to .so objects.
# (usually includes ${CPICFLAGS})
# CAPICFLAGS: flags for ${CC} to compiling .[Ss] files
# (usually just ${CPPPICFLAGS} ${CPICFLAGS})
# APICFLAGS: flags for ${AS} to assemble .[sS] to .so objects.
.if ${MACHINE_ARCH} == "alpha" # {
FPICFLAGS ?= -fPIC
CPICFLAGS ?= -fPIC -DPIC
CPPPICFLAGS?= -DPIC
CAPICFLAGS?= ${CPPPICFLAGS} ${CPICFLAGS}
APICFLAGS ?=
.elif (${MACHINE_ARCH} == "sparc" || ${MACHINE_ARCH} == "sparc64") && \
${OBJECT_FMT} == "ELF" # } {
# If you use -fPIC you need to define BIGPIC to turn on 32-bit
# relocations in asm code
FPICFLAGS ?= -fPIC
CPICFLAGS ?= -fPIC -DPIC
CPPPICFLAGS?= -DPIC -DBIGPIC
CAPICFLAGS?= ${CPPPICFLAGS} ${CPICFLAGS}
APICFLAGS ?= -KPIC
.else # } {
# Platform-independent flags for NetBSD shared libraries
SHLIB_SOVERSION=${SHLIB_FULLVERSION}
SHLIB_SHFLAGS=
FPICFLAGS ?= -fPIC
CPICFLAGS?= -fPIC -DPIC
CPPPICFLAGS?= -DPIC
CAPICFLAGS?= ${CPPPICFLAGS} ${CPICFLAGS}
APICFLAGS?= -k
.endif # }
.if ${MKPICLIB} != "no"
CSHLIBFLAGS+= ${CPICFLAGS}
.endif
.if defined(CSHLIBFLAGS) && !empty(CSHLIBFLAGS)
MKSHLIBOBJS= yes
.else
MKSHLIBOBJS= no
.endif
# Platform-independent linker flags for ELF shared libraries
.if ${OBJECT_FMT} == "ELF"
SHLIB_SOVERSION= ${SHLIB_MAJOR}
SHLIB_SHFLAGS= -Wl,-soname,${_LIB_PREFIX}${LIB}.so.${SHLIB_SOVERSION}
SHLIB_SHFLAGS+= -Wl,--warn-shared-textrel
SHLIB_LDSTARTFILE?= ${DESTDIR}/usr/lib/crti.o ${_GCC_CRTBEGINS}
SHLIB_LDENDFILE?= ${_GCC_CRTENDS} ${DESTDIR}/usr/lib/crtn.o
.endif
CFLAGS+= ${COPTS}
OBJCFLAGS+= ${OBJCOPTS}
@ -56,30 +230,154 @@ FFLAGS+= ${FOPTS}
.c.o:
${_MKTARGET_COMPILE}
${COMPILE.c} ${COPTS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${CPUFLAGS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${CPPFLAGS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${.IMPSRC} -o ${.TARGET}
# .if !defined(CFLAGS) || empty(CFLAGS:M*-g*)
# ${OBJCOPY} -x ${.TARGET}
# .endif
.if !defined(CFLAGS) || empty(CFLAGS:M*-g*)
${OBJCOPY} -x ${.TARGET}
.endif
.c.po:
${_MKTARGET_COMPILE}
${COMPILE.c} ${PROFFLAGS} ${COPTS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${CPUFLAGS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${CPPFLAGS.${.IMPSRC:T}} -pg ${.IMPSRC} -o ${.TARGET}
.if !defined(CFLAGS) || empty(CFLAGS:M*-g*)
${OBJCOPY} -X ${.TARGET}
.endif
.c.go:
${_MKTARGET_COMPILE}
${COMPILE.c} ${DEBUGFLAGS} ${COPTS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${CPUFLAGS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${CPPFLAGS.${.IMPSRC:T}} -g ${.IMPSRC} -o ${.TARGET}
.c.so:
${_MKTARGET_COMPILE}
${COMPILE.c} ${COPTS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${CPUFLAGS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${CPPFLAGS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${CSHLIBFLAGS} ${.IMPSRC} -o ${.TARGET}
.if !defined(CFLAGS) || empty(CFLAGS:M*-g*)
${OBJCOPY} -x ${.TARGET}
.endif
.cc.o .cpp.o .cxx.o .C.o:
${_MKTARGET_COMPILE}
${COMPILE.cc} ${COPTS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${CPUFLAGS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${CPPFLAGS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${.IMPSRC} -o ${.TARGET}
# .if !defined(CFLAGS) || empty(CFLAGS:M*-g*)
# ${OBJCOPY} -x ${.TARGET}
# .endif
.if !defined(CFLAGS) || empty(CFLAGS:M*-g*)
${OBJCOPY} -x ${.TARGET}
.endif
.cc.po .cpp.po .cxx.po .C.po:
${_MKTARGET_COMPILE}
${COMPILE.cc} ${PROFFLAGS} ${COPTS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${CPUFLAGS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${CPPFLAGS.${.IMPSRC:T}} -pg ${.IMPSRC} -o ${.TARGET}
.if !defined(CFLAGS) || empty(CFLAGS:M*-g*)
${OBJCOPY} -X ${.TARGET}
.endif
.cc.go .cpp.go .cxx.go .C.go:
${_MKTARGET_COMPILE}
${COMPILE.cc} ${DEBUGFLAGS} ${COPTS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${CPUFLAGS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${CPPFLAGS.${.IMPSRC:T}} -g ${.IMPSRC} -o ${.TARGET}
.cc.so .cpp.so .cxx.so .C.so:
${_MKTARGET_COMPILE}
${COMPILE.cc} ${COPTS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${CPUFLAGS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${CPPFLAGS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${CSHLIBFLAGS} ${.IMPSRC} -o ${.TARGET}
.if !defined(CFLAGS) || empty(CFLAGS:M*-g*)
${OBJCOPY} -x ${.TARGET}
.endif
.f.o:
${_MKTARGET_COMPILE}
${COMPILE.f} ${.IMPSRC} -o ${.TARGET}
.if !defined(FOPTS) || empty(FOPTS:M*-g*)
${OBJCOPY} -x ${.TARGET}
.endif
.f.po:
${_MKTARGET_COMPILE}
${COMPILE.f} ${PROFFLAGS} -pg ${.IMPSRC} -o ${.TARGET}
.if !defined(FOPTS) || empty(FOPTS:M*-g*)
${OBJCOPY} -X ${.TARGET}
.endif
.f.go:
${_MKTARGET_COMPILE}
${COMPILE.f} ${DEBUGFLAGS} -g ${.IMPSRC} -o ${.TARGET}
.f.so:
${_MKTARGET_COMPILE}
${COMPILE.f} ${FPICFLAGS} ${.IMPSRC} -o ${.TARGET}
.if !defined(FOPTS) || empty(FOPTS:M*-g*)
${OBJCOPY} -x ${.TARGET}
.endif
.f.ln:
${_MKTARGET_COMPILE}
@echo Skipping lint for Fortran libraries.
.m.o:
${_MKTARGET_COMPILE}
${COMPILE.m} ${OBJCOPTS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${.IMPSRC} -o ${.TARGET}
.if !defined(OBJCFLAGS) || empty(OBJCFLAGS:M*-g*)
${OBJCOPY} -x ${.TARGET}
.endif
.m.po:
${_MKTARGET_COMPILE}
${COMPILE.m} ${PROFFLAGS} -pg ${OBJCOPTS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${.IMPSRC} -o ${.TARGET}
.if !defined(OBJCFLAGS) || empty(OBJCFLAGS:M*-g*)
${OBJCOPY} -X ${.TARGET}
.endif
.m.go:
${_MKTARGET_COMPILE}
${COMPILE.m} ${DEBUGFLAGS} -g ${OBJCOPTS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${.IMPSRC} -o ${.TARGET}
.if !defined(OBJCFLAGS) || empty(OBJCFLAGS:M*-g*)
${OBJCOPY} -X ${.TARGET}
.endif
.m.so:
${_MKTARGET_COMPILE}
${COMPILE.m} ${CSHLIBFLAGS} ${OBJCOPTS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${.IMPSRC} -o ${.TARGET}
.if !defined(OBJCFLAGS) || empty(OBJCFLAGS:M*-g*)
${OBJCOPY} -x ${.TARGET}
.endif
.s.o:
${_MKTARGET_COMPILE}
${COMPILE.s} ${COPTS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${CPUFLAGS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${CPPFLAGS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${.IMPSRC} -o ${.TARGET}
# ${OBJCOPY} -x ${.TARGET}
${OBJCOPY} -x ${.TARGET}
.S.o:
${_MKTARGET_COMPILE}
${COMPILE.S} ${COPTS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${CPUFLAGS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${CPPFLAGS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${.IMPSRC} -o ${.TARGET}
# ${OBJCOPY} -x ${.TARGET}
${OBJCOPY} -x ${.TARGET}
.s.po:
${_MKTARGET_COMPILE}
${COMPILE.s} ${PROFFLAGS} ${COPTS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${CPUFLAGS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${CPPFLAGS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${.IMPSRC} -o ${.TARGET}
${OBJCOPY} -X ${.TARGET}
.S.po:
${_MKTARGET_COMPILE}
${COMPILE.S} ${PROFFLAGS} ${COPTS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${CPUFLAGS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${CPPFLAGS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${.IMPSRC} -o ${.TARGET}
${OBJCOPY} -X ${.TARGET}
.s.go:
${_MKTARGET_COMPILE}
${COMPILE.s} ${DEBUGFLAGS} ${COPTS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${CPUFLAGS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${CPPFLAGS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${.IMPSRC} -o ${.TARGET}
.S.go:
${_MKTARGET_COMPILE}
${COMPILE.S} ${DEBUGFLAGS} ${COPTS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${CPUFLAGS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${CPPFLAGS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${.IMPSRC} -o ${.TARGET}
.s.so:
${_MKTARGET_COMPILE}
${COMPILE.s} ${CAPICFLAGS} ${COPTS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${CPUFLAGS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${CPPFLAGS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${.IMPSRC} -o ${.TARGET}
${OBJCOPY} -x ${.TARGET}
.S.so:
${_MKTARGET_COMPILE}
${COMPILE.S} ${CAPICFLAGS} ${COPTS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${CPUFLAGS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${CPPFLAGS.${.IMPSRC:T}} ${.IMPSRC} -o ${.TARGET}
${OBJCOPY} -x ${.TARGET}
.if defined(LIB) # {
.if (${MKPIC} == "no" || (defined(LDSTATIC) && ${LDSTATIC} != "") \
|| ${MKLINKLIB} != "no") && ${MKSTATICLIB} != "no"
_LIBS=lib${LIB}.a
.else
_LIBS=
.endif
OBJS+=${SRCS:N*.h:N*.sh:R:S/$/.o/g}
@ -93,9 +391,56 @@ LOBJS+=${LSRCS:.c=.ln} ${SRCS:M*.c:.c=.ln}
libinstall::
.endif # ${LIBISPRIVATE} == "no" # {
ALLOBJS=
.if ${MKDEBUGLIB} != "no"
_LIBS+=lib${LIB}_g.a
GOBJS+=${OBJS:.o=.go}
DEBUGFLAGS?=-DDEBUG
.endif
.if ${MKPROFILE} != "no"
_LIBS+=lib${LIB}_p.a
POBJS+=${OBJS:.o=.po}
PROFFLAGS?=-DGPROF -DPROF
.endif
.if ${MKPIC} != "no" # {
.if ${MKPICLIB} == "no"
.if ${MKSHLIBOBJS} != "no"
# make _pic.a, which isn't really pic,
# since it's needed for making shared lib.
# but don't install it.
SOLIB=lib${LIB}_pic.a
SOBJS+=${OBJS:.o=.so}
.else
SOLIB=lib${LIB}.a
.endif
.else
SOLIB=lib${LIB}_pic.a
_LIBS+=${SOLIB}
SOBJS+=${OBJS:.o=.so}
.endif
.if defined(SHLIB_FULLVERSION)
_LIBS+=lib${LIB}.so.${SHLIB_FULLVERSION}
.endif
.endif # }
.if ${MKLINT} != "no" && !empty(LOBJS)
_LIBS+=llib-l${LIB}.ln
.endif
ALLOBJS=
.if (${MKPIC} == "no" || (defined(LDSTATIC) && ${LDSTATIC} != "") \
|| ${MKLINKLIB} != "no") && ${MKSTATICLIB} != "no"
ALLOBJS+=${STOBJS}
.endif
ALLOBJS+=${POBJS} ${SOBJS}
.if ${MKLINT} != "no" && !empty(LOBJS)
ALLOBJS+=${LOBJS}
.endif
.else # !defined(LIB) # } {
LOBJS=
SOBJS=
.endif # !defined(LIB) # }
_YLSRCS= ${SRCS:M*.[ly]:C/\..$/.c/} ${YHEADER:D${SRCS:M*.y:.y=.h}}
@ -105,20 +450,36 @@ realall: ${SRCS} ${ALLOBJS:O} ${_LIBS}
MKARZERO?=no
#_ARFL=crs
_ARFL=cr
.if ${MKARZERO} == "yes"
_ARFL=crsD
_ARRANFL=sD
_INSTRANLIB=
.else
_ARFL=crs
_ARRANFL=s
#_INSTRANLIB=${empty(PRESERVE):?-a "${RANLIB} -t":}
.endif
# If you change this, please consider reflecting the change in
# the override in sys/rump/Makefile.rump.
.if !target(__archivebuild)
__archivebuild: .USE
${_MKTARGET_BUILD}
rm -f ${.TARGET}
# ${AR} ${_ARFL} ${.TARGET} `NM=${NM} ${LORDER} ${.ALLSRC:M*o} | ${TSORT}`
${AR} ${_ARFL} ${.TARGET} ${.ALLSRC:M*o}
.endif
.if !target(__archiveinstall)
__archiveinstall: .USE
${_MKTARGET_INSTALL}
${INSTALL_FILE} -o ${LIBOWN} -g ${LIBGRP} -m ${LIBMODE} \
${_INSTRANLIB} ${.ALLSRC} ${.TARGET}
.endif
__archivesymlinkpic: .USE
${_MKTARGET_INSTALL}
${INSTALL_SYMLINK} ${.ALLSRC} ${.TARGET}
DPSRCS+= ${_YLSRCS}
CLEANFILES+= ${_YLSRCS}
@ -127,31 +488,271 @@ ${STOBJS} ${POBJS} ${GOBJS} ${SOBJS} ${LOBJS}: ${DPSRCS}
lib${LIB}.a:: ${STOBJS} __archivebuild
lib${LIB}_p.a:: ${POBJS} __archivebuild
lib${LIB}_pic.a:: ${SOBJS} __archivebuild
lib${LIB}_g.a:: ${GOBJS} __archivebuild
_LIBLDOPTS=
#.if ${SHLIBDIR} != "/usr/lib"
#_LIBLDOPTS+= -Wl,-rpath-link,${DESTDIR}${SHLIBDIR}:${DESTDIR}/usr/lib \
# -R${SHLIBDIR} \
# -L${DESTDIR}${SHLIBDIR}
#.elif ${SHLIBINSTALLDIR} != "/usr/lib"
#_LIBLDOPTS+= -Wl,-rpath-link,${DESTDIR}${SHLIBINSTALLDIR}:${DESTDIR}/usr/lib \
# -L${DESTDIR}${SHLIBINSTALLDIR}
#.endif
# gcc -shared now adds -lc automatically. For libraries other than libc and
# libgcc* we add as a dependency the installed shared libc. For libc and
# libgcc* we avoid adding libc as a dependency by using -nostdlib. Note that
# -Xl,-nostdlib is not enough because we want to tell the compiler-driver not
# to add standard libraries, not the linker.
.if !defined(LIB)
DPLIBC ?= ${DESTDIR}${LIBC_SO}
.else
.if ${LIB} != "c" && ${LIB:Mgcc*} == ""
DPLIBC ?= ${DESTDIR}${LIBC_SO}
.else
LDLIBC ?= -nodefaultlibs
.if ${LIB} == "c"
LDADD+= -lgcc_pic
.endif
.endif
.endif
.if ${LIBISCXX} != "no"
LIBCC:= ${CXX}
.else
LIBCC:= ${CC}
.endif
lib${LIB}.so.${SHLIB_FULLVERSION}: ${SOLIB} ${DPADD} ${DPLIBC} \
${SHLIB_LDSTARTFILE} ${SHLIB_LDENDFILE}
${_MKTARGET_BUILD}
rm -f lib${LIB}.so.${SHLIB_FULLVERSION}
.if defined(DESTDIR)
${LIBCC} ${LDLIBC} -Wl,-nostdlib -B${_GCC_CRTDIR}/ -B${DESTDIR}/usr/lib/ \
-Wl,-x -shared ${SHLIB_SHFLAGS} -o ${.TARGET} \
-Wl,--whole-archive ${SOLIB} \
-Wl,--no-whole-archive ${LDADD} \
${_LIBLDOPTS} ${LDFLAGS} \
-L${_GCC_LIBGCCDIR}
.else
${LIBCC} ${LDLIBC} -Wl,-x -shared ${SHLIB_SHFLAGS} ${LDFLAGS} \
-o ${.TARGET} ${_LIBLDOPTS} \
-Wl,--whole-archive ${SOLIB} -Wl,--no-whole-archive ${LDADD}
.endif
.if ${OBJECT_FMT} == "ELF"
# We don't use INSTALL_SYMLINK here because this is just
# happening inside the build directory/objdir. XXX Why does
# this spend so much effort on libraries that aren't live??? XXX
.if defined(SHLIB_FULLVERSION) && defined(SHLIB_MAJOR) && \
"${SHLIB_FULLVERSION}" != "${SHLIB_MAJOR}"
${HOST_LN} -sf lib${LIB}.so.${SHLIB_FULLVERSION} lib${LIB}.so.${SHLIB_MAJOR}.tmp
mv -f lib${LIB}.so.${SHLIB_MAJOR}.tmp lib${LIB}.so.${SHLIB_MAJOR}
.endif
${HOST_LN} -sf lib${LIB}.so.${SHLIB_FULLVERSION} lib${LIB}.so.tmp
mv -f lib${LIB}.so.tmp lib${LIB}.so
.endif
.if ${MKSTRIPIDENT} != "no"
${OBJCOPY} -R .ident ${.TARGET}
.endif
.if !empty(LOBJS) # {
LLIBS?= -lc
llib-l${LIB}.ln: ${LOBJS}
${_MKTARGET_COMPILE}
rm -f llib-l${LIB}.ln
.if defined(DESTDIR)
${LINT} -C${LIB} ${.ALLSRC} -L${DESTDIR}/usr/libdata ${LLIBS}
.else
${LINT} -C${LIB} ${.ALLSRC} ${LLIBS}
.endif
.endif # }
lint: ${LOBJS}
.if defined(LOBJS) && !empty(LOBJS)
${LINT} ${LINTFLAGS} ${LOBJS}
.endif
cleanlib: .PHONY
rm -f a.out [Ee]rrs mklog core *.core ${CLEANFILES}
rm -f lib${LIB}.a ${STOBJS}
rm -f lib${LIB}_p.a ${POBJS}
rm -f lib${LIB}_g.a ${GOBJS}
rm -f lib${LIB}_pic.a lib${LIB}.so.* lib${LIB}.so ${SOBJS}
rm -f ${STOBJS:=.tmp} ${POBJS:=.tmp} ${SOBJS:=.tmp} ${GOBJS:=.tmp}
rm -f llib-l${LIB}.ln ${LOBJS}
.if !target(libinstall) # {
# Make sure it gets defined, in case MKPIC==no && MKLINKLIB==no
libinstall::
.if ${MKLINKLIB} != "no" && ${MKSTATICLIB} != "no"
libinstall:: ${DESTDIR}${LIBDIR}/lib${LIB}.a
.PRECIOUS: ${DESTDIR}${LIBDIR}/lib${LIB}.a
${_MKTARGET_INSTALL}
${INSTALL_FILE} -o ${LIBOWN} -g ${LIBGRP} -m ${LIBMODE} \
${.ALLSRC} ${.TARGET}
.if ${MKUPDATE} == "no"
.if !defined(BUILD) && !make(all) && !make(lib${LIB}.a)
${DESTDIR}${LIBDIR}/lib${LIB}.a! .MADE
.endif
${DESTDIR}${LIBDIR}/lib${LIB}.a! lib${LIB}.a __archiveinstall
.else
.if !defined(BUILD) && !make(all) && !make(lib${LIB}.a)
${DESTDIR}${LIBDIR}/lib${LIB}.a: .MADE
.endif
${DESTDIR}${LIBDIR}/lib${LIB}.a: lib${LIB}.a __archiveinstall
.endif
.endif
.if ${MKPROFILE} != "no"
libinstall:: ${DESTDIR}${LIBDIR}/lib${LIB}_p.a
.PRECIOUS: ${DESTDIR}${LIBDIR}/lib${LIB}_p.a
.if ${MKUPDATE} == "no"
.if !defined(BUILD) && !make(all) && !make(lib${LIB}_p.a)
${DESTDIR}${LIBDIR}/lib${LIB}_p.a! .MADE
.endif
${DESTDIR}${LIBDIR}/lib${LIB}_p.a! lib${LIB}_p.a __archiveinstall
.else
.if !defined(BUILD) && !make(all) && !make(lib${LIB}_p.a)
${DESTDIR}${LIBDIR}/lib${LIB}_p.a: .MADE
.endif
${DESTDIR}${LIBDIR}/lib${LIB}_p.a: lib${LIB}_p.a __archiveinstall
.endif
.endif
.if ${MKDEBUGLIB} != "no"
libinstall:: ${DESTDIR}${LIBDIR}/lib${LIB}_g.a
.PRECIOUS: ${DESTDIR}${LIBDIR}/lib${LIB}_g.a
.if ${MKUPDATE} == "no"
.if !defined(BUILD) && !make(all) && !make(lib${LIB}_g.a)
${DESTDIR}${LIBDIR}/lib${LIB}_g.a! .MADE
.endif
${DESTDIR}${LIBDIR}/lib${LIB}_g.a! lib${LIB}_g.a __archiveinstall
.else
.if !defined(BUILD) && !make(all) && !make(lib${LIB}_g.a)
${DESTDIR}${LIBDIR}/lib${LIB}_g.a: .MADE
.endif
${DESTDIR}${LIBDIR}/lib${LIB}_g.a: lib${LIB}_g.a __archiveinstall
.endif
.endif
.if ${MKPIC} != "no" && ${MKPICINSTALL} != "no"
libinstall:: ${DESTDIR}${LIBDIR}/lib${LIB}_pic.a
.PRECIOUS: ${DESTDIR}${LIBDIR}/lib${LIB}_pic.a
.if ${MKUPDATE} == "no"
.if !defined(BUILD) && !make(all) && !make(lib${LIB}_pic.a)
${DESTDIR}${LIBDIR}/lib${LIB}_pic.a! .MADE
.endif
.if ${MKPICLIB} == "no"
${DESTDIR}${LIBDIR}/lib${LIB}_pic.a! lib${LIB}.a __archivesymlinkpic
.else
${DESTDIR}${LIBDIR}/lib${LIB}_pic.a! lib${LIB}_pic.a __archiveinstall
.endif
.else
.if !defined(BUILD) && !make(all) && !make(lib${LIB}_pic.a)
${DESTDIR}${LIBDIR}/lib${LIB}_pic.a: .MADE
.endif
.if ${MKPICLIB} == "no"
${DESTDIR}${LIBDIR}/lib${LIB}_pic.a: lib${LIB}.a __archivesymlinkpic
.else
${DESTDIR}${LIBDIR}/lib${LIB}_pic.a: lib${LIB}_pic.a __archiveinstall
.endif
.endif
.endif
.if ${MKPIC} != "no" && defined(SHLIB_FULLVERSION)
_LIB_SO_TGT= ${DESTDIR}${_LIBSODIR}/${_LIB_PREFIX}${LIB}.so
_LIB_SO_TGTLIBDIR= ${DESTDIR}${LIBDIR}/${_LIB_PREFIX}${LIB}.so
libinstall:: ${_LIB_SO_TGT}.${SHLIB_FULLVERSION}
.PRECIOUS: ${_LIB_SO_TGT}.${SHLIB_FULLVERSION}
.if ${MKUPDATE} == "no"
.if !defined(BUILD) && !make(all) && !make(lib${LIB}.so.${SHLIB_FULLVERSION})
${_LIB_SO_TGT}.${SHLIB_FULLVERSION}! .MADE
.endif
${_LIB_SO_TGT}.${SHLIB_FULLVERSION}! lib${LIB}.so.${SHLIB_FULLVERSION}
.else
.if !defined(BUILD) && !make(all) && !make(lib${LIB}.so.${SHLIB_FULLVERSION})
${_LIB_SO_TGT}.${SHLIB_FULLVERSION}: .MADE
.endif
${_LIB_SO_TGT}.${SHLIB_FULLVERSION}: lib${LIB}.so.${SHLIB_FULLVERSION}
.endif
${_MKTARGET_INSTALL}
${INSTALL_FILE} -o ${LIBOWN} -g ${LIBGRP} -m ${LIBMODE} \
${.ALLSRC} ${.TARGET}
.if ${_LIBSODIR} != ${LIBDIR}
${INSTALL_SYMLINK} -l r \
${_LIB_SO_TGT}.${SHLIB_FULLVERSION} \
${_LIB_SO_TGTLIBDIR}.${SHLIB_FULLVERSION}
.endif
.if ${OBJECT_FMT} == "a.out" && !defined(DESTDIR)
/sbin/ldconfig -m ${_LIBSODIR} ${LIBDIR}
.endif
.if ${OBJECT_FMT} == "ELF"
.if defined(SHLIB_FULLVERSION) && defined(SHLIB_MAJOR) && \
"${SHLIB_FULLVERSION}" != "${SHLIB_MAJOR}"
${INSTALL_SYMLINK} \
${_LIB_PREFIX}${LIB}.so.${SHLIB_FULLVERSION} \
${_LIB_SO_TGT}.${SHLIB_MAJOR}
.if ${_LIBSODIR} != ${LIBDIR}
${INSTALL_SYMLINK} -l r \
${_LIB_SO_TGT}.${SHLIB_FULLVERSION} \
${_LIB_SO_TGTLIBDIR}.${SHLIB_MAJOR}
.endif
.endif
.if ${MKLINKLIB} != "no"
${INSTALL_SYMLINK} \
${_LIB_PREFIX}${LIB}.so.${SHLIB_FULLVERSION} \
${_LIB_SO_TGT}
.if ${_LIBSODIR} != ${LIBDIR}
${INSTALL_SYMLINK} -l r \
${_LIB_SO_TGT}.${SHLIB_FULLVERSION} \
${_LIB_SO_TGTLIBDIR}
.endif
.endif
.endif
.endif
.if ${MKLINT} != "no" && !empty(LOBJS)
libinstall:: ${DESTDIR}${LINTLIBDIR}/llib-l${LIB}.ln
.PRECIOUS: ${DESTDIR}${LINTLIBDIR}/llib-l${LIB}.ln
.if ${MKUPDATE} == "no"
.if !defined(BUILD) && !make(all) && !make(llib-l${LIB}.ln)
${DESTDIR}${LINTLIBDIR}/llib-l${LIB}.ln! .MADE
.endif
${DESTDIR}${LINTLIBDIR}/llib-l${LIB}.ln! llib-l${LIB}.ln
.else
.if !defined(BUILD) && !make(all) && !make(llib-l${LIB}.ln)
${DESTDIR}${LINTLIBDIR}/llib-l${LIB}.ln: .MADE
.endif
${DESTDIR}${LINTLIBDIR}/llib-l${LIB}.ln: llib-l${LIB}.ln
.endif
${_MKTARGET_INSTALL}
${INSTALL_FILE} -o ${LIBOWN} -g ${LIBGRP} -m ${LIBMODE} \
${.ALLSRC} ${DESTDIR}${LINTLIBDIR}
.endif
.endif # !target(libinstall) # }
##### Pull in related .mk logic
LINKSOWN?= ${LIBOWN}
LINKSGRP?= ${LIBGRP}
LINKSMODE?= ${LIBMODE}
.include <bsd.man.mk>
#.include <bsd.nls.mk>
.include <bsd.files.mk>
.include <bsd.inc.mk>
.include <bsd.links.mk>
.include <bsd.dep.mk>
.include <minix.gcc.mk>
${TARGETS}: # ensure existence

290
share/mk/bsd.man.mk
View file

@ -3,44 +3,46 @@
.include <bsd.init.mk>
MKCATPAGES := no
MKHTML := no
##### Basic targets
.PHONY: maninstall manpages manlinks
#.PHONY: catinstall maninstall catpages manpages catlinks manlinks
#.PHONY: htmlinstall htmlpages htmllinks
.PHONY: catinstall maninstall catpages manpages catlinks manlinks
.PHONY: htmlinstall htmlpages htmllinks
.if ${MKMANDOC} == "yes"
.PHONY: lintmanpages
.endif
realinstall: ${MANINSTALL}
##### Default values
# .if ${USETOOLS} == "yes"
# TMACDEPDIR?= ${TOOLDIR}/share/groff/tmac
# .else
# TMACDEPDIR?= /usr/share/tmac
# .endif
.if ${USETOOLS} == "yes"
TMACDEPDIR?= ${TOOLDIR}/share/groff/tmac
.else
TMACDEPDIR?= /usr/share/tmac
.endif
# HTMLDIR?= ${DESTDIR}${MANDIR}
# CATDEPS?= ${TMACDEPDIR}/andoc.tmac \
# ${TMACDEPDIR}/doc.tmac \
# ${TMACDEPDIR}/mdoc/doc-common \
# ${TMACDEPDIR}/mdoc/doc-ditroff \
# ${TMACDEPDIR}/mdoc/doc-nroff \
# ${TMACDEPDIR}/mdoc/doc-syms
# HTMLDEPS?= ${TMACDEPDIR}/doc2html.tmac
# MANTARGET?= cat
HTMLDIR?= ${DESTDIR}${MANDIR}
CATDEPS?= ${TMACDEPDIR}/andoc.tmac \
${TMACDEPDIR}/doc.tmac \
${TMACDEPDIR}/mdoc/doc-common \
${TMACDEPDIR}/mdoc/doc-ditroff \
${TMACDEPDIR}/mdoc/doc-nroff \
${TMACDEPDIR}/mdoc/doc-syms
HTMLDEPS?= ${TMACDEPDIR}/doc2html.tmac
MANTARGET?= cat
# MAN?=
# MLINKS?=
# _MNUMBERS= 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
# .SUFFIXES: ${_MNUMBERS:@N@.$N@}
MAN?=
MLINKS?=
_MNUMBERS= 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
.SUFFIXES: ${_MNUMBERS:@N@.$N@}
# .if ${MKMANZ} == "no"
# MANCOMPRESS?=
# MANSUFFIX?=
# .else
# MANCOMPRESS?= gzip -ncf
# MANSUFFIX?= .gz
# .endif
.if ${MKMANZ} == "no"
MANCOMPRESS?=
MANSUFFIX?=
.else
MANCOMPRESS?= gzip -ncf
MANSUFFIX?= .gz
.endif
# make MANCOMPRESS a filter, so it can be inserted on an as-needed basis
.if !empty(MANCOMPRESS)
@ -118,140 +120,140 @@ manlinks:: ${_t}
.endfor
.endif # ${MKMAN} != "no"
# ##### Build and install rules (plaintext pages)
##### Build and install rules (plaintext pages)
# .if (${MKCATPAGES} != "no") && (${MKMAN} != "no")
# catinstall: catpages catlinks
# catpages:: # ensure target exists
# CATPAGES= ${MAN:C/\.([1-9])$/.cat\1${MANSUFFIX}/}
.if (${MKCATPAGES} != "no") && (${MKMAN} != "no")
catinstall: catpages catlinks
catpages:: # ensure target exists
CATPAGES= ${MAN:C/\.([1-9])$/.cat\1${MANSUFFIX}/}
# realall: ${CATPAGES}
# .NOPATH: ${CATPAGES}
# .SUFFIXES: ${_MNUMBERS:@N@.cat$N${MANSUFFIX}@}
# .MADE: ${CATDEPS}
realall: ${CATPAGES}
.NOPATH: ${CATPAGES}
.SUFFIXES: ${_MNUMBERS:@N@.cat$N${MANSUFFIX}@}
.MADE: ${CATDEPS}
# ${_MNUMBERS:@N@.$N.cat$N${MANSUFFIX}@}: ${CATDEPS} # build rule
# ${_MKTARGET_FORMAT}
# .if defined(USETBL)
# ${TOOL_TBL} ${.IMPSRC} | ${TOOL_ROFF_ASCII} -mandoc ${MANCOMPRESS} \
# > ${.TARGET}.tmp && mv ${.TARGET}.tmp ${.TARGET}
# .elif ${MKMANDOC} == yes && !defined(NOMANDOC)
# if test ""${NOMANDOC.${.IMPSRC:T}:tl:Q} != "yes"; then \
# ${TOOL_MANDOC_ASCII} ${.IMPSRC} ${MANCOMPRESS} \
# > ${.TARGET}.tmp && mv ${.TARGET}.tmp ${.TARGET}; \
# else \
# ${TOOL_ROFF_ASCII} -mandoc ${.IMPSRC} ${MANCOMPRESS} \
# > ${.TARGET}.tmp && mv ${.TARGET}.tmp ${.TARGET}; \
# fi
# .else
# ${TOOL_ROFF_ASCII} -mandoc ${.IMPSRC} ${MANCOMPRESS} \
# > ${.TARGET}.tmp && mv ${.TARGET}.tmp ${.TARGET}
# .endif
${_MNUMBERS:@N@.$N.cat$N${MANSUFFIX}@}: ${CATDEPS} # build rule
${_MKTARGET_FORMAT}
.if defined(USETBL)
${TOOL_TBL} ${.IMPSRC} | ${TOOL_ROFF_ASCII} -mandoc ${MANCOMPRESS} \
> ${.TARGET}.tmp && mv ${.TARGET}.tmp ${.TARGET}
.elif ${MKMANDOC} == yes && !defined(NOMANDOC)
if test ""${NOMANDOC.${.IMPSRC:T}:tl:Q} != "yes"; then \
${TOOL_MANDOC_ASCII} ${.IMPSRC} ${MANCOMPRESS} \
> ${.TARGET}.tmp && mv ${.TARGET}.tmp ${.TARGET}; \
else \
${TOOL_ROFF_ASCII} -mandoc ${.IMPSRC} ${MANCOMPRESS} \
> ${.TARGET}.tmp && mv ${.TARGET}.tmp ${.TARGET}; \
fi
.else
${TOOL_ROFF_ASCII} -mandoc ${.IMPSRC} ${MANCOMPRESS} \
> ${.TARGET}.tmp && mv ${.TARGET}.tmp ${.TARGET}
.endif
# .for F in ${CATPAGES:S/${MANSUFFIX}$//:O:u}
# _F:= ${DESTDIR}${MANDIR}/${F:T:E}${MANSUBDIR}/${F:R}.0${MANSUFFIX}
.for F in ${CATPAGES:S/${MANSUFFIX}$//:O:u}
_F:= ${DESTDIR}${MANDIR}/${F:T:E}${MANSUBDIR}/${F:R}.0${MANSUFFIX}
# .if ${MKUPDATE} == "no"
# ${_F}! ${F}${MANSUFFIX} __installpage # install rule
# .if !defined(BUILD) && !make(all) && !make(${F})
# ${_F}! .MADE # no build at install
# .endif
# .else
# ${_F}: ${F}${MANSUFFIX} __installpage # install rule
# .if !defined(BUILD) && !make(all) && !make(${F})
# ${_F}: .MADE # no build at install
# .endif
# .endif
.if ${MKUPDATE} == "no"
${_F}! ${F}${MANSUFFIX} __installpage # install rule
.if !defined(BUILD) && !make(all) && !make(${F})
${_F}! .MADE # no build at install
.endif
.else
${_F}: ${F}${MANSUFFIX} __installpage # install rule
.if !defined(BUILD) && !make(all) && !make(${F})
${_F}: .MADE # no build at install
.endif
.endif
# catpages:: ${_F}
# .PRECIOUS: ${_F} # keep if install fails
# .endfor
catpages:: ${_F}
.PRECIOUS: ${_F} # keep if install fails
.endfor
# catlinks:: # link install
catlinks:: # link install
# .for _src _dst in ${MLINKS}
# _l:=${DESTDIR}${MANDIR}/cat${_src:T:E}${MANSUBDIR}/${_src:R}.0${MANSUFFIX}
# _t:=${DESTDIR}${MANDIR}/cat${_dst:T:E}${MANSUBDIR}/${_dst:R}.0${MANSUFFIX}
.for _src _dst in ${MLINKS}
_l:=${DESTDIR}${MANDIR}/cat${_src:T:E}${MANSUBDIR}/${_src:R}.0${MANSUFFIX}
_t:=${DESTDIR}${MANDIR}/cat${_dst:T:E}${MANSUBDIR}/${_dst:R}.0${MANSUFFIX}
# # Handle case conflicts carefully, when _dst occurs
# # more than once after case flattening
# .if ${MKUPDATE} == "no" || ${MLINKS:tl:M${_dst:tl:Q}:[\#]} > 1
# ${_t}! ${_l} __linkinstallpage
# .else
# ${_t}: ${_l} __linkinstallpage
# .endif
# Handle case conflicts carefully, when _dst occurs
# more than once after case flattening
.if ${MKUPDATE} == "no" || ${MLINKS:tl:M${_dst:tl:Q}:[\#]} > 1
${_t}! ${_l} __linkinstallpage
.else
${_t}: ${_l} __linkinstallpage
.endif
# catlinks:: ${_t}
# .PRECIOUS: ${_t}
# .endfor
# .endif # (${MKCATPAGES} != "no") && (${MKMAN} != "no")
catlinks:: ${_t}
.PRECIOUS: ${_t}
.endfor
.endif # (${MKCATPAGES} != "no") && (${MKMAN} != "no")
# ##### Build and install rules (HTML pages)
##### Build and install rules (HTML pages)
# .if (${MKHTML} != "no") && (${MKMAN} != "no") # {
# htmlinstall: htmlpages htmllinks
# htmlpages:: # ensure target exists
# HTMLPAGES= ${MAN:C/\.([1-9])$/.html\1/}
.if (${MKHTML} != "no") && (${MKMAN} != "no") # {
htmlinstall: htmlpages htmllinks
htmlpages:: # ensure target exists
HTMLPAGES= ${MAN:C/\.([1-9])$/.html\1/}
# realall: ${HTMLPAGES}
# .NOPATH: ${HTMLPAGES}
# .SUFFIXES: ${_MNUMBERS:@N@.html$N@}
# .MADE: ${HTMLDEPS}
realall: ${HTMLPAGES}
.NOPATH: ${HTMLPAGES}
.SUFFIXES: ${_MNUMBERS:@N@.html$N@}
.MADE: ${HTMLDEPS}
# ${_MNUMBERS:@N@.$N.html$N@}: ${HTMLDEPS} # build rule
# ${_MKTARGET_FORMAT}
# .if ${MKMANDOC} == "yes" && !defined(NOMANDOC)
# if test ""${NOMANDOC.${.IMPSRC:T}:tl:Q} != "yes"; then \
# ${TOOL_MANDOC_HTML} ${.IMPSRC} > ${.TARGET}.tmp && \
# mv ${.TARGET}.tmp ${.TARGET}; \
# else \
# ${TOOL_ROFF_HTML} ${.IMPSRC} > ${.TARGET}.tmp && \
# mv ${.TARGET}.tmp ${.TARGET}; \
# fi
# .else
# ${TOOL_ROFF_HTML} ${.IMPSRC} > ${.TARGET}.tmp && \
# mv ${.TARGET}.tmp ${.TARGET}
# .endif
${_MNUMBERS:@N@.$N.html$N@}: ${HTMLDEPS} # build rule
${_MKTARGET_FORMAT}
.if ${MKMANDOC} == "yes" && !defined(NOMANDOC)
if test ""${NOMANDOC.${.IMPSRC:T}:tl:Q} != "yes"; then \
${TOOL_MANDOC_HTML} ${.IMPSRC} > ${.TARGET}.tmp && \
mv ${.TARGET}.tmp ${.TARGET}; \
else \
${TOOL_ROFF_HTML} ${.IMPSRC} > ${.TARGET}.tmp && \
mv ${.TARGET}.tmp ${.TARGET}; \
fi
.else
${TOOL_ROFF_HTML} ${.IMPSRC} > ${.TARGET}.tmp && \
mv ${.TARGET}.tmp ${.TARGET}
.endif
# .for F in ${HTMLPAGES:O:u}
# # construct installed path
# _F:= ${HTMLDIR}/${F:T:E}${MANSUBDIR}/${F:R:S-/index$-/x&-}.html
.for F in ${HTMLPAGES:O:u}
# construct installed path
_F:= ${HTMLDIR}/${F:T:E}${MANSUBDIR}/${F:R:S-/index$-/x&-}.html
# .if ${MKUPDATE} == "no"
# ${_F}! ${F} __installpage # install rule
# .if !defined(BUILD) && !make(all) && !make(${F})
# ${_F}! .MADE # no build at install
# .endif
# .else
# ${_F}: ${F} __installpage # install rule
# .if !defined(BUILD) && !make(all) && !make(${F})
# ${_F}: .MADE # no build at install
# .endif
# .endif
.if ${MKUPDATE} == "no"
${_F}! ${F} __installpage # install rule
.if !defined(BUILD) && !make(all) && !make(${F})
${_F}! .MADE # no build at install
.endif
.else
${_F}: ${F} __installpage # install rule
.if !defined(BUILD) && !make(all) && !make(${F})
${_F}: .MADE # no build at install
.endif
.endif
# htmlpages:: ${_F}
# .PRECIOUS: ${_F} # keep if install fails
# .endfor
htmlpages:: ${_F}
.PRECIOUS: ${_F} # keep if install fails
.endfor
# htmllinks:: # link install
htmllinks:: # link install
# .for _src _dst in ${MLINKS}
# _l:=${HTMLDIR}/html${_src:T:E}${MANSUBDIR}/${_src:R:S-/index$-/x&-}.html
# _t:=${HTMLDIR}/html${_dst:T:E}${MANSUBDIR}/${_dst:R:S-/index$-/x&-}.html
.for _src _dst in ${MLINKS}
_l:=${HTMLDIR}/html${_src:T:E}${MANSUBDIR}/${_src:R:S-/index$-/x&-}.html
_t:=${HTMLDIR}/html${_dst:T:E}${MANSUBDIR}/${_dst:R:S-/index$-/x&-}.html
# # Handle case conflicts carefully, when _dst occurs
# # more than once after case flattening
# .if ${MKUPDATE} == "no" || ${MLINKS:tl:M${_dst:tl:Q}:[\#]} > 1
# ${_t}! ${_l} __linkinstallpage
# .else
# ${_t}: ${_l} __linkinstallpage
# .endif
# Handle case conflicts carefully, when _dst occurs
# more than once after case flattening
.if ${MKUPDATE} == "no" || ${MLINKS:tl:M${_dst:tl:Q}:[\#]} > 1
${_t}! ${_l} __linkinstallpage
.else
${_t}: ${_l} __linkinstallpage
.endif
# htmllinks:: ${_t}
# .PRECIOUS: ${_t}
# .endfor
htmllinks:: ${_t}
.PRECIOUS: ${_t}
.endfor
# .endif # }
.endif # }
##### Clean rules
.undef _F
@ -275,10 +277,10 @@ cleanman: .PHONY
.endif
# (XXX ${CATPAGES:S...} cleans up old .catN files where .catN.gz now used)
# .if ${MKMANDOC} == "yes" && !empty(MANPAGES)
# lintmanpages: ${MANPAGES}
# ${TOOL_MANDOC_LINT} -Tlint -fstrict ${.ALLSRC}
# .endif
.if ${MKMANDOC} == "yes" && !empty(MANPAGES)
lintmanpages: ${MANPAGES}
${TOOL_MANDOC_LINT} -Tlint -fstrict ${.ALLSRC}
.endif
##### Pull in related .mk logic
.include <bsd.obj.mk>